Hach sc200 User Manual Download Page 572

Page: 572 / 875

HIGH SPEED

LOW SPEED

39.4

8.00 1.00 109

47.2

9.50 1.40 118

34.8

4.75 0.38 103

42.7

5.70 0.54 113

32.5

3.25 0.19 100

39.9

3.99 0.28 109

27.0

2.25 0.10

34.3

2.75 0.14 102

24.0

1.65 0.05

30.1

2.00 0.08

43.4

9.00 1.20

53.2 10.50 1.70 103

43.2

5.90 0.56

50.7

6.70 0.70 101

40.0

4.00 0.28 92

49.0

4.90 0.40 99

37.2

3.00 0.17

45.5

3.70 0.24

34.2

2.30 0.10

42.0

2.75 0.14

32.0

1.60 0.07

40.9

2.10 0.09

60.0 12.00 2.10

71.7 14.25 3.00 104

54.0

7.25 0.85

64.7

8.50 1.20 100

47.5

4.75 0.38 89

58.8

5.88 0.56 96

39.0

2.70 0.14

47.3

3.20 0.19

33.0

1.75 0.06

40.3

2.00 0.08

76.4 15.40 2.10

91.3 18.25 2.90 107

72.0

9.70 0.85

85.7 11.25 1.10 104

67.5

6.75 0.42 95

82.0

8.20 0.62 102

58.6

4.00 0.16

71.7

4.75 0.22

54.0

2.50 0.06

63.0

3.05 0.10

90.9 18.25 2.50

95 108.5 21.50 4.00 101

85.2 11.30 1.15

92 100.8 13.25 1.30

82.0

8.20 0.63 91

95.2

9.52 0.70 96

72.0

4.75 0.21

87.2

5.90 0.34

63.0

3.25 0.10

77.0

3.80 0.14

108.2 22.30 2.60 102 129.5 26.70 3.50 110
102.7 14.00 1.20

99 123.5 17.00 1.60 108

96.8

9.90 0.65 97 117.8 12.10 0.90 105

85.6

5.80 0.32

93 106.7

7.30 0.38 101

74.6

3.80 0.09

95.7

4.90 0.20

117.5 23.50 5.40

94 138.3 27.70 7.00 100

109.4 14.60 2.00

92 131.2 17.25 2.70

103.0 10.30 1.00 90 124.5 12.45 1.50 96

89.4

6.00 0.38

86 110.3

7.30 0.54

75.0

3.75 0.15

95.9

4.75 0.23

129.0 19.25 2.20

93 152.6 20.20 2.50

123.0 12.30 1.00 91 147.5 14.75 1.40 97

115.8

9.40 0.58

89 141.7 11.50 0.85

108.0

7.25 0.35

87 133.0

8.85 0.50

93.0

4.70 0.15

84 117.2

5.75 0.22

148.2 19.75 2.80 103 173.2 22.75 3.60 110

145.0 14.50 1.50 102 170.0 17.00 2.10 109

141.0 11.25 0.95 101 168.0 13.50 1.35 109
133.4

9.00 0.60

99 162.7 10.75 0.85 107

114.0

5.75 0.25

93 144.9

7.25 0.42 102

171.0 22.75 3.60

97 203.0 26.75 5.00 104

165.0 16.50 2.00 96 195.0 19.50 2.60 102

159.0 12.80 1.20

95 189.0 15.25 1.70 101

154.5 10.25 0.80

94 185.5 12.25 1.10 100

138.0

7.00 0.38

90 171.5

8.50 0.54

200.0 20.00 2.80 91 238.0 23.80 3.80 96

192.0 16.00 1.80

89 232.7 18.75 2.50

190.6 12.75 1.20

89 228.2 15.25 1.60

175.4

8.75 0.56

87 215.0 10.75 0.85

294.0 29.40 3.60 96 350.0 35.00 5.20 103

282.0 22.50 2.00

94 340.2 27.50 3.20 101

265.4 17.75 1.40

92 325.5 21.75 2.00 100

238.6 12.00 0.65

89 294.0 14.60 0.95

420.0 42.00 5.00 95 511.0 51.10 7.50 103

396.0 31.50 3.00

93 485.1 39.50 4.50 101

358.6 24.50 1.70

90 456.7 30.50 2.80

319.4 16.00 0.65

87 408.8 20.40 1.20

MBH USGPM WPD FAT

MBH USGPM WPD FAT HEIGHT SPREAD

200°F

180°F

200°F

MAXIMUM*

PROJECTION

FAN

SIZE

HEIGHT SPREAD

MAXIMUM*

PROJECTION

180°F

ENTERING WATER TEMPERATURE

WATER

TEMP.

DROP

°F

CAT.

NO.

V-40

CFM 750

RPM 1550

HP 1/30

V-48

CFM 1150

RPM 1550

HP 1/12

V-66

CFM 1500

RPM 1725

HP 1/4

V-84

CFM 1435

RPM 1100

HP 1/6

V-96

CFM 2425

RPM 1725

HP 1/4

V-106

CFM 2400

RPM 1075

HP 1/4

V-130

CFM 3200

RPM 1075

HP 1/4

V-140

CFM 3660

RPM 1100

HP 1/2

V-180

CFM 3200

RPM 1100

HP 1/2

V-200

CFM 4250

RPM 1100

HP 1/2

V-252

CFM 6000

RPM 1075

HP 3/4

V-370

CFM 7600

RPM 1075

HP 3/4

V-520

CFM 11100

RPM 1100

HP 2

10
15

25
30

10
15

25
30
40

10
15

30
40

10
15

30
40

10
15

30
40

10
15

30
40

10
15

30
40

25
30
40

33.0

6.65 0.52 120

40.0

7.80 0.95 132

27.6

3.75 0.25 110

34.3

4.50 0.35 122

23.0

2.30 0.10 102

29.4

2.94 0.16 113

18.0

1.50 0.05

24.5

2.00 0.08 104

16.4

1.00 0.02

21.0

1.30 0.04

36.6

7.45 0.85 103

43.4

8.55 1.10 111

33.6

4.55 0.35 100

40.3

5.25 0.65 108

32.5

3.25 0.19 98

38.8

3.88 0.26 106

27.0

2.25 0.09

34.3

2.75 0.14 100

24.0

1.65 0.06

30.1

2.00 0.08

48.0

9.50 1.40

106

57.4 11.40 2.05 115

42.0

5.50 0.70

100

50.7

6.75 0.73 108

36.0

3.60 0.23 94

48.8

4.88 0.40 107

31.4

2.50 0.12

33.6

2.40 0.11

24.0

1.20 0.03

31.5

1.50 0.05

66.0 13.25 1.50 106

78.7 15.70 2.10 114

61.4

8.25 0.60 102

73.5

9.85 1.90 111

57.5

5.75 0.30 100

70.0

7.00 0.45 108

48.0

3.25 0.10

59.5

4.00 0.16 101

42.0

2.00 0.04

52.5

2.55 0.07

73.2 14.60 1.90 103

86.8 17.25 2.60 111

69.0

9.25 0.80 101

81.9 10.75 1.10 108

65.0

6.50 0.40 98

79.0

7.90 0.58 107

54.0

3.60 0.13

68.3

4.50 0.20 100

49.2

2.50 0.06

59.5

3.00 0.09

84.0 16.90 2.60 103 100.0 20.00 3.70 112
79.2 10.60 1.10 101

94.5 12.45 1.50 109

70.0

7.00 0.50 96

87.5

8.75 0.75 105

54.0

3.70 0.15

68.3

4.50 0.21

42.0

2.20 0.06

54.6

2.75 0.09

108.2 22.20 2.60 102 128.9 26.60 3.50 110
102.2 14.00 1.20 100 123.0 16.90 1.60 108

96.4

9.90 0.65 97 117.3 12.10 0.90 105

85.2

5.80 0.32

93 106.2

7.30 0.38 101

74.3

3.80 0.09

95.3

4.90 0.23

109.4 14.60 1.35

97 129.5 17.00 1.80 103

104.0 10.40 0.70 95 124.5 12.45 1.00 102

94.8

7.75 0.40

92 119.0

9.50 0.60 100

87.0

6.00 0.25

89 110.3

7.30 0.36

73.4

3.75 0.10

95.9

4.75 0.15

127.2 17.00 2.10 111 148.7 19.75 2.80 119

123.6 12.36 1.15 109 145.2 14.52 1.50 118

114.0

9.25 0.65 105 138.6 11.25 0.95 115

105.0

7.10 0.40 102 130.2

8.70 0.58 112

88.4

4.50 0.16

95 112.7

5.60 0.24 105

145.4 19.30 2.60 102 172.2 22.75 3.60 110

140.0 14.00 1.45 101 167.5 16.75 2.10 109

135.0 10.75 0.85

99 161.0 13.00 1.30 107

127.2

8.50 0.55

97 155.4 10.25 0.80 105

110.4

5.50 0.24

92 145.2

7.25 0.40 102

171.0 17.10 2.10 96 202.5 20.25 2.70 103

166.6 13.50 1.30

95 197.7 16.00 1.80 102

160.4 10.75 0.85

94 192.5 12.75 1.20 101

150.0

7.50 0.42

92 178.5

8.80 0.44

247.5 24.75 2.60 101 297.5 29.75 4.00 110

232.4 18.75 1.50

99 285.2 23.00 2.30 108

219.0 14.60 0.95

97 267.7 17.85 1.40 105

196.4

9.90 0.42

93 241.5 12.00 0.62 100

MBH USGPM WPD FAT

WATER

TEMP.

DROP

°F

CAT.

NO.

V-30

CFM 510

RPM 1000

HP 1/30

V-38

CFM 780

RPM 1000

HP 1/12

V-50

CFM 955

RPM 1075

HP 1/4

V-70

CFM 1340

RPM 820

HP 1/6

V-80

CFM 1545

RPM 1075

HP 1/4

V-90

CFM 1790

RPM 850

HP 1/4

V-108

CFM 2380

RPM 850

HP 1/4

V-124

CFM 2730

RPM 820

HP 1/2

V-144

CFM 2380

RPM 820

HP 1/2

V-170

CFM 3160

RPM 820

HP 1/2

V-204

CFM 4470

RPM 820

HP 3/4

V-300

CFM 5660

RPM 820

HP 3/4

10
15

25
30

10
15

25
30
40

10
15

30
40

10
15

30
40

10
15

30
40

10
15

30
40

10
15

30
40

25
30
40

12 28

12 22

14 35

12 29

15 46

14 40

18 58

15 35

18 58

17 44

20 55

17 44

18 60

15 46

20 55

17 44

14 31

12 31

18 35

18 31

26 69

22 45

35 68

25 51

45 85

12” Ø

14” Ø

16” Ø

18” Ø

20” Ø

24” Ø

30” Ø

H O T W A T E R C A P A C I T I E S

V E R T I C A L P R O J E C T I O N

TABLE 9

No cone diffuser (standard unit).

60°F ENTERING AIR TEMPERATURE

For MBH at EWT other than those indicated in the tables, use
200°F MBH and multiply by factor in table 10. MBH obtained will be
at

USGPM of 200°F MBH

used.

UNIT HEATERS

Summary of Contents for sc200

Page 1: ...the current version of controller hardware Discrete Input Setup Configures three discrete input channels Language Assigns the language used in the controller 2 Select an option and push ENTER to activate the menu item Maintenance C A U T I O N Multiple hazards Only qualified personnel must conduct the tasks described in this section of the document Cleaning the controller D A N G E R Always remove...

Page 2: ... the instructions of the card manufacturer to format the SD card on a PC Make sure the card is not larger than 32 GB Make sure an SD card is being used Other types of cards such as xSD micro SD mini SD will not work properly Information not saving or not saving properly to the SD card Make sure the SD card is properly formatted with the FAT 32 format The MMC format is not supported Follow the inst...

Page 3: ...play Pessage If the sensor is an analog sensor and a corresponding module is installed in the controller refer to the instructions supplied with the Network or Sensor Module Make sure the digital connector wiring harness is seated on the inside of the door assembly and that the wiring harness is not damaged If the digital sensor is connected to the controller with a digital termination box user su...

Page 4: ...ch com www hach com HACH LANGE GMBH Willst tterstra e 11 D 40549 D sseldorf Germany Tel 49 0 2 11 52 88 320 Fax 49 0 2 11 52 88 210 info hach lange de www hach lange de HACH LANGE Sàrl 6 route de Compois 1222 Vésenaz SWIT ERLAND Tel 41 22 594 6400 Fax 41 22 594 6499 Hach Company Hach Lange GmbH 2011 2013 All rights reserved Printed in U S A ...

Page 5: ...DOC023 53 80040 sc200 Controller 01 2014 Edition 7 User Manual ...

Page 6: ......

Page 7: ...tion 8 Mounting components and dimensions 8 Controller mounting 9 High voltage barrier 11 Electrostatic discharge ESD considerations 11 Wiring overview 11 Wiring for power 13 Alarms and relays 15 Wiring relays 15 Analog output connections 18 Discrete input wiring connections 18 Connect a digital sc sensor 20 Connect the optional digital communication output 20 Install a Secure Digital SD memory ca...

Page 8: ...mode 28 Bilinear output mode 28 Configure relays 28 Display setup 36 Update the date and time 36 Set the datalog mode and interval 37 Set up a calculation 37 Set up the discrete inputs 37 Update the display language 38 Using the secure digital memory SD card 38 Updating software 39 Saving data and event logs with SD cards 39 Access data and event log files on the SD card 40 Firmware updates with S...

Page 9: ... the controller 42 Fuse replacement 42 Battery replacement 42 Troubleshooting 42 Test and Maintenance menu 44 Warning and error conditions 45 Device scan information 45 Replacement parts and accessories 45 Table of Contents 3 ...

Page 10: ...Table of Contents 4 ...

Page 11: ...DT user configured contacts rated 250 VAC 5 Amp resistive maximum for the AC powered controller and 24 VDC 5A resistive maximum for the DC powered controller Relays are designed for connection to AC Mains circuits i e whenever the controller is operated with 115 240 VAC power or DC circuits i e whenever the controller is operated with 24 VDC power Dimensions DIN 144 x 144 x 180 9 mm 5 7 x 5 7 x 7 ...

Page 12: ...ause damage to the instrument Information that requires special emphasis Precautionary labels Read all labels and tags attached to the instrument Personal injury or damage to the instrument could occur if not observed A symbol on the instrument is referenced in the manual with a precautionary statement This symbol if noted on the instrument references the instruction manual for operation and or sa...

Page 13: ...xperiencing interference connect the equipment to a different outlet 3 Move the equipment away from the device receiving the interference 4 Reposition the receiving antenna for the device receiving the interference 5 Try combinations of the above Product overview The controller displays sensor measurements and other data can transmit analog and digital signals and can interact with and control oth...

Page 14: ...mental constituents such as salt spray and hydrogen sulfide Protection against environmental damage is strongly recommended for outdoor use 1ote Units tKat Kave tKe UnderZriters aEoratories U certification are intended for indoor use only and do not Kave a 1 M IP rating Controller mounting options The controller can be mounted to a panel to a wall or to a vertical or horizontal pipe A neoprene sea...

Page 15: ... M5 x 0 8 Keps hexnut 4x 4 Vibration isolation gasket for pipe mount 9 Pan head screws M5 x 0 8 x 100mm 4x Used for variable diameter pipe mount installations 5 Vibration isolation washer for pipe mount 4x 10 Pan head screws M5 x 0 8 x 15 mm 4x 1ote EracNet for panel Pounting is availaEle as an optional accessory Controller mounting Figure 3 Surface mounting dimensions nglisK 9 ...

Page 16: ...K tKe controller tKrougK tKe Kole in tKe panel and tKen slide tKe EracNet over tKe controller on tKe EacN side of tKe panel Use tKe four 15 PP pan Kead screZs supplied to attacK tKe EracNet to tKe controller and secure tKe controller to tKe panel Figure 5 Pipe mounting vertical pipe 10 nglisK ...

Page 17: ...formance or eventual failure Refer to the steps in this procedure to prevent ESD damage to the instrument Touch an earth grounded metal surface such as the chassis of an instrument a metal conduit or pipe to discharge static electricity from the body Avoid excessive movement Transport static sensitive components in anti static containers or packages Wear a wrist strap connected by a wire to earth ...

Page 18: ...nput wiring connector1 2 4 20 mA output1 6 Ground terminals 10 Digital sensor connector1 3 Sensor module connector 7 Relay connections1 4 Communication module connector e g Modbus Profibus HART optional 4 20 mA module etc 8 Digital sensor connector1 1 Terminals can be removed for improved access 12 nglisK ...

Page 19: ...e made at the same terminals A local disconnect designed to meet local electrical code is required and must be identified for all types of installation In hard wired applications the power and safety ground service drops for the instrument must be 18 to 12 AWG Notes The voltage barrier must be removed before making any electrical connections After making all connections replace the voltage barrier...

Page 20: ...14 nglisK ...

Page 21: ...G Potential fire hazard The relay contacts are rated 5A and are not fused External loads connected to the relays must have current limiting devices provided to limit current to 5 A W A R N I N G Potential fire hazard Do not daisy chain the common relay connections or jumper wire from the mains power connection inside the instrument W A R N I N G Potential electrocution hazard In order to maintain ...

Page 22: ...ess than 18 AWG is not recommended The Normally Open NO and Common COM relay contacts will be connected when an alarm or other condition is active The Normally Closed NC and Common relay contacts will be connected when an alarm or other condition is inactive unless the Fail Safe is set to Yes or when power is removed from the controller Most relay connections use either the NO and COM terminals or...

Page 23: ... nglisK 17 ...

Page 24: ...1 2 Output 1 1 1 Open the controller cover 2 Feed the wires through the strain relief 3 Adjust the wire as necessary and tighten the strain relief 4 Make connections with twisted pair shielded wire and connect the shield at the controlled component end or at the control loop end Do not connect the shield at both ends of the cable Use of non shielded cable may result in radio frequency emission or ...

Page 25: ... Input 2 5 6 Input 3 8 7 Input 3 7 8 Figure 10 umper settings 1 Input 1 configuration jumpers 4 Jumpers positioned to the left for switch inputs 2 Input 2 configuration jumpers 5 Jumpers positioned to the right for voltage inputs 3 Input 3 configuration jumpers 1 Open the controller cover 2 Feed the wires through the cable gland 3 Adjust the wire as necessary and tighten the cable gland 4 The jump...

Page 26: ... If a new device is found the controller performs the installation process without further user action Retain the connector cap to seal the connector opening in case the sensor must be removed Figure 11 Digital sensor quick connect 1 Connect the optional digital communication output The manufacturer supports Modbus RS485 Modbus RS232 Profibus DPV1 and HART communication protocols The optional digi...

Page 27: ...enus change settings and increment or decrement digits 4 ENTER key Accepts input values updates or displayed menu options Inputs and outputs are set up and configured through the front panel using the keypad and display screen This user interface is used to set up and configure inputs and outputs create log information and calculated values and calibrate sensors The SD interface can be used to sav...

Page 28: ...n will no longer be displayed once all problems have been corrected or acknowledged Error An error icon consists of an exclamation point within a circle When an error occurs the error icon and the measurement screen flash alternately in the main display To view errors push the MENU key and select Diagnostics Then select the device to view any problems associated with that device Additional display...

Page 29: ...s powered on for the first time and when it is powered on after the configuration settings have been set to their default values After the language date and time options are set for the first time update the options as necessary through the sc200 setup menu 1 In the Language screen highlight a language in the options list and push the ENTER key English is the default language for the controller Th...

Page 30: ...option and push ENTER to activate the menu item Advanced operation Security setup Enable or disable the passcode By default the passcode option is disabled and all configuration settings and calibrations can be changed When the passcode function is enabled access to Sensor calibration and Test Maint menus requires a passcode To enable the passcode 1 From the Settings Menu select sc200 Setup and pu...

Page 31: ...ion and push ENTER b Make a selection or update the entries c Push ENTER to save the changes Option Description Edit name Edits the module name Edit units Edits the measurement units Edit parameter Edits the parameter name Option Description Display range For the 0 20 mA scale Set the 20 mA value Set the 0 mA value For the 4 20 mA scale Set the 20 mA value Set the 4 mA value Sets the values used f...

Page 32: ...ulations To configure the options highlight a menu option push ENTER and select an option or update the entries Push ENTER after an option is selected or the entries are updated 1 From the Settings menu select sc200 Setup 2 Select Output Setup 3 Select Output 1 or Output 2 4 Choose Select Source and select a source from the list Typically the source is one of the sensors attached to the system If ...

Page 33: ...desired control point of process Prop band A function of the difference between the measured signal and the desired setpoint Integral The period of time from the injection point of a reagent to contact with the measuring device Derivative Used to compensate for the 2nd order effects of the process The majority of applications can be controlled without the use of the derivative setting Transit time...

Page 34: ...s 5 Low value 2 Source value axis 6 Minimum output current 0 4 mA 3 High value 7 Knee point current 4 Knee point value 8 Maximum output current 20 mA Configure relays The Normally Open NO and Common COM relay contacts will be connected when an alarm or other condition is active The Normally Closed NC and Common relay contacts will be connected when an alarm or other condition is inactive unless th...

Page 35: ... depending on a process value Frequency control Relay switches with a frequency depending on a process value Warning Relay indicates warning and error conditions in probes 6 From the Relay Setup menu select Set Transfer and choose Active or Inactive 7 From the Relay Setup menu select Fail Safe and choose Yes or No 8 From the Relay Setup menu select Activation The activation options for the selecte...

Page 36: ... the low alarm value For example if the low alarm is set for 1 0 and the low deadband is set for 0 5 the relay remains on between 1 0 and 1 5 Default is 5 of the range High deadband Sets the range where the relay remains on after the measured value decreases below the high alarm value For example if the high alarm is set for 4 0 and the high deadband is set for 0 5 the relay remains on between 3 5...

Page 37: ...amount of change necessary after the relay setpoint is reached in order to satisfy a condition Overfeed timer Sets a time period for de activating an active relay if the process setpoint cannot be reached Once an overfeed alarm is present it must be manually reset Off delay Sets a delay time for the relay to turn off default 0 seconds On delay Sets a delay time for the relay to turn on default 0 s...

Page 38: ... will not swing unregulated when the process value converges to the setpoint Option Description OnMax timer Sets the maximum time the relay can stay on independent from the measured value default 0 min OffMax timer Sets the maximum time the relay can stay off independent from the measured value default 0 min OnMin timer Sets the minimum time the relay can stay on independent from the measured valu...

Page 39: ... Low alarm 2 High alarm 6 Time x axis 3 Deadband 7 OnMax time 4 Setpoint 8 OffMax time Figure 22 Event control function OnMin timer OffMin timer 1 High alarm 5 Time x axis 2 Deadband 6 OffMin timer 3 Setpoint 7 OnMin timer 4 Low alarm 8 Source y axis nglisK 33 ...

Page 40: ...t signal until the limits of the dead zone are reached Period Sets the cycle duration of the PWM output signal default 5 seconds Min width Sets the minimum PWM ratio default 1 0 second Max width Sets the maximum PWM ratio default 4 0 seconds Prop band Sets the proportional part of the PID controller The proportional part of the controller supplies an output signal which is linearly dependent to th...

Page 41: ... The cycle duration is equal to the duty cycle of the output signal Minimum pulses Sets the minimum number of pulses per minute at which the relay can operate Range 0 001 4 000 default 1 000 Maximum pulses Sets the maximum number of pulses per minute at which the relay can operate Range 0 001 60 000 default 04 000 This value cannot be set lower than Minimum Pulses value Prop band Sets the proporti...

Page 42: ...d change their order in the display See Default Order View the default display order Set to Default Set the display order to the default configuration 1ote SoPe of tKe aEove Zill not Ee availaEle if no adMustPent is possiEle for tKat option e g 5eorder ist and 5emove 0easurements Zill not Ee availaEle if only one PeasurePent is selected for display Display Contrast Adjust the contrast to a value b...

Page 43: ...or the y variable Set parameter Y Selects the sensor measurement for the y variable Option Description Set formula Select the math function to implement None Disables the math function X Y Subtraction function X Y Addition function X Y Division function X Y Percentage function X Y 2 Average function X Y Multiplication function X Y X Difference function Display format Selects the number of digits a...

Page 44: ...ired changes and push ENTER to save the changes and return to the Inputs Setting menu Update the display language The display language can be changed through the Setup menu 1 From the Settings Menu select sc200 Setup and push ENTER 2 Select Language and push ENTER The list of language options appears English is the default language for the controller 3 Highlight the language to be used for the con...

Page 45: ... will show Transfer failed and an error message Press the ENTER key to acknowledge the warning and exit out of the menu Error messages are different for each sensor Refer to the applicable sensor manual Saving data and event logs with SD cards Notes Data and event logs can be downloaded to an SD card and viewed with any device capable of reading an SD card Data logs store the measurement data at s...

Page 46: ...exists in the device folder b Open the Excel application c Go to File Open d Select the data log file e In the Import XML dialog box select Open the file with the following style sheet applied and select HachDatalog xml f Click OK to view the data 6 To view binary data log flg files a Make sure the device driver flg drv file exists in the device folder b Open Data Com c In the File Viewer section ...

Page 47: ...Retrieve Settings and push ENTER b Select the devices that contain the information to be transferred All devices are selected by default To deselect an item highlight the selection and push the left arrow key Push ENTER to begin the file transfers Wait for the Transfer complete message c If files already exist on the SD card a confirmation window appears Select the devices again and push ENTER Wai...

Page 48: ...t in controllers indicates severe technical failure and is therefore considered to be a service activity If a blown fuse is suspected contact Technical Support Battery replacement The lithium ion backup battery is not user replaceable Contact technical support for replacement Troubleshooting Problem Resolution No current output Verify current output configuration Test current output signal using t...

Page 49: ... files on the SD card Problem Resolution Controller cannot find software updates on the SD card Make sure an appropriate folder is created by installing the SD card in the controller An update folder will automatically be created Install the SD card on a PC and make sure the software files are located in the appropriate update folder If the same SD card is used with multiple controllers each contr...

Page 50: ...Test and Maintenance menu 1 From the Settings Menu select Test Maint and push ENTER Option Description Scan devices Performs a scan for active and missing devices Option Description Output cal Output 1 Output 2 Lets the user calibrate the 4 20 mA outputs with a 250 ohm resistor in series to the mA output terminals The settings for each output are adjusted until the correct value 4 mA or 20 mA is s...

Page 51: ...the device manual Device scan information Display message Action Installing device please wait The controller has found a new device No action is necessary The controller automatically performs an installation process for the new device and displays the main measurement screen of the device installed in the number one position Device missing device id A previously installed device has been removed...

Page 52: ...installation kit 9177800 Cord grip kit 1 9178000 Sealing washer for cord grip assembly 1033814 UV protection screen 8809200 Weather and sun shield w UV protection screen 9220600 Sensor and communication modules Conductivity module 9013000 Flow module 9012700 4 20 mA input module 9012800 pH and DO module 9012900 4 20 mA output module 9334600 HART network module kit 9328100 Modbus network module 901...

Page 53: ......

Page 54: ...ch com www hach com HACH LANGE GMBH Willst tterstra e 11 D 40549 D sseldorf Germany Tel 49 0 2 11 52 88 320 Fax 49 0 2 11 52 88 210 info hach lange de www hach lange de HACH LANGE Sàrl 6 route de Compois 1222 Vésenaz SWIT ERLAND Tel 41 22 594 6400 Fax 41 22 594 6499 Hach Company Hach Lange GmbH 2011 2013 All rights reserved Printed in U S A ...

Page 56: ...Visit us at www hach com ...

Page 57: ...he Quick connect Fittings 14 3 3 Using the Digital Gateway 14 3 3 1 Wiring the Digital Gateway 15 3 3 2 Mounting the Digital Gateway 17 3 4 Installing the Sensor in the Sample Stream 18 Section 4 User Interface and Navigation 21 4 1 Using the sc100 Controller 21 4 1 1 Controller Display Features 22 4 1 2 Important Key Presses 22 4 2 Using the sc1000 Controller 23 4 2 1 Display Features 23 4 2 1 1 ...

Page 58: ...ORP Sensor Operation 40 7 4 1 Troubleshooting the ORP Sensor without Integral Digital Electronics 40 7 4 2 Troubleshooting the ORP Sensor with Integral Digital Electronics 40 Section 8 Replacement Parts and Accessories 41 8 1 Replacement Items Accessories and Reagent and Standards 41 Section 9 How to Order 43 Section 10 Repair Service 44 Section 11 Limited Warranty 45 Section 12 Compliance Informa...

Page 59: ...Built in Temperature Element NTC 300 ohm thermistor for automatic temperature compensation and analyzer temperature readout NTC 300 ohm thermistor for automatic temperature compensation and analyzer temperature readout NTC 300 ohm thermistor for analyzer temperature readout only not for automatic temperature compensation Stability 0 03 pH per 24 hours non cumulative 0 03 pH per 24 hours non cumula...

Page 60: ...ion for analog sensor with digital gateway 10 m 31 ft for sensor with integral digital electronics 6 m 20 ft 7 7 m 25 ft interconnect cable extension for analog sensor with digital gateway 10 m 31 ft for sensor with integral digital electronics 6 m 20 ft 7 7 m 25 ft interconnect cable extension for analog sensor with digital gateway 10 m 31 ft for sensor with integral digital electronics Probe Wei...

Page 61: ...cautionary Labels Read all labels and tags attached to the instrument Personal injury or damage to the instrument could occur if not observed 2 2 General Sensor Information Optional equipment such as mounting hardware for the probe is supplied with instructions for all user installation tasks Several mounting options are available allowing the probe to be adapted for use in many different applicat...

Page 62: ...ting into a flow cell or the pipe adapter of a ball valve hardware assembly This hardware enables the sensor to be inserted into or retracted from the process without stopping the process flow Sanitary Body Style features a built in 2 inch flange for mounting into a 2 inch sanitary tee Included with the sanitary style sensor is a special cap and EDPM compound gasket for use with the sanitary hardw...

Page 63: ...14 inches 271 3 mm 10 68 inches 29 5 mm 1 16 inches 54 6 mm 2 15 inches 1 inch NPT 232 15 mm 9 14 inches 49 8 mm 1 96 inches 29 5 mm 1 16 inches 26 7 mm 1 05 inches 34 8 mm 1 37 inches 39 11 mm 1 54 inches 271 3 mm 10 68 inches 59 44 mm 2 34 inches 54 6 mm 2 15 inches 32 8 mm 1 29 inches 43 9 mm 1 73 inches 1 inch NPT 1 inch NPT 57 2 mm 2 25 inches 29 5 mm 1 16 inches 35 8 mm 1 41 inches 4 5 mm 0 ...

Page 64: ...ge Save the protective cap for future use For short term storage when sensor is out of the process for more than one hour fill the protective cap with pH 4 buffer or DI water and place the cap back on the sensor Keeping the process electrode and salt bridge moist will avoid slow response when the sensor is placed back in operation For extended storage repeat the short term storage procedure every ...

Page 65: ...B C D Reportez vous au schéma de contrôle 58600 78 du Manuel du contrôleur sc100 Réf 58600 18 pour connaître les versions des capteurs admises et les conditions d installation 3 1 1 Connecting the sc Sensor to a sc100 Controller in a Non hazardous Location 3 1 1 1 Attaching a sc Sensor with a Quick connect Fitting Important Note The standard quick connect fitting is NOT suitable for Class 1 Divisi...

Page 66: ... and wires and install the threaded plug on the opening to maintain the environmental rating 5 Cut the connector from the sensor cable 6 Strip the insulation on the cable back 1 inch Strip inch of each individual wire end 7 Pass the cable through conduit and a conduit hub or a strain relief fitting Cat No 16664 and an available access hole in the controller enclosure Tighten the fitting Note Use o...

Page 67: ... NON DANGEROUX NC NC NC COM COM COM NO F1 F2 NO NO RELAY 3 RELAY 2 RELAY 1 1 1 DATA DATA OUT 2 OUT 2 DATA OUT 2 SERVICE REQUEST SHIELD CHASSIS GND V V OUT 1 OUT 1 GND OUT 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 PROBES ANALOG OUTPUTS PCB CONNECTOR PCB CONNECTOR FIELD WIRING INSULATION MUST BE RATED TO 80 C MINIMUM FIELD WIRING INSULATION MUST BE RATED TO 80 C MINIMUM J1 J2 J4 NETWORK INTERFACE CARD J3 U5 U9 S1 DANGER ...

Page 68: ...e 7 Align the lock over the connector and squeeze the two halves together to lock To remove the connector safety lock by inserting a small flat bladed screwdriver into the locking groove Pivot the screwdriver away from the groove and separate the two halves Figure 7 Figure 7 Installing the Connector Safety Lock 3 2 Connecting the Sensor to the sc1000 3 2 1 Connecting the Sensor using the Quick con...

Page 69: ...ed off or the area is known to be non hazardous DANGER Risque d explosion Couper le courant ou s assurer que l emplacement est designe non dangereux avant de replacer le aucon composant 1 Route the cable from the sensor through the strain relief in the digital gateway then properly terminate the wire ends see Figure 8 Note Do not tighten the strain relief until the digital gateway is wired and the...

Page 70: ...onnector 9 Insert wires into connector according to Table 4 Use the included 2 mm screwdriver Cat No 6134300 to secure connections 4 Digital gateway back 10 Screw back of digital gateway onto front 5 Cable bushing 11 Push cable bushing and anti rotation washer into back 6 Anti rotation washer 12 Fasten cord grip securely Assembly is complete ...

Page 71: ...ng clip over the center of the digital gateway and squeeze the clip together to secure Figure 10 Digital Gateway Dimensions Figure 11 Mounting the Digital Gateway Table 4 Wiring the Digital Gateway Cat No 6120500 Sensor wire color Sensor Signal Digital Gateway J1 Green Ref J1 1 Yellow Temp J1 2 Black Temp J1 3 White VI J1 4 Red Active J1 5 Clear Shield J1 6 Clear w shrink wrap Shield J1 6 1 Mounti...

Page 72: ...tire process Mount the sensor at least 508 mm 20 in from the aeration basin wall and immerse it at least 508 mm 20 in into the process 1 Sanitary mount 19 PVC Insertion mount 16 Union mount 20 Stainless steel insertion mount 17 Flow through mount 21 Immersion mount 18 Hanging stainless steel sensor with the bale 22 Immersion mount ball float aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa ...

Page 73: ...the sensor using the instructions supplied with the installation apparatus See Figure 12 for suggested mounting configurations Sensor must be mounted at least 15º above horizontal See Figure 13 Figure 13 Sensor Mounting Angle ...

Page 74: ...20 Installation ...

Page 75: ...able 5 Controller Key Functions Features Number Key Function 2 Moves back one level in the menu structure 3 Moves to the main menu from other menus This key is not active in menus where a selection or other input must be made 4 Navigates through the menus changes settings and increments and decrements digits 5 Moves to the Main Measurement screen from any other screen This key is not active in men...

Page 76: ...e UP and DOWN keys to toggle the status bar at the bottom of the measurement display to display the secondary measurement temperature and output information When in Menu mode an arrow may appear on the right side of the display to indicate that more menus are available Press the UP or DOWN key corresponding to the arrow direction to display additional menus 1 Status bar Indicates the sensor name a...

Page 77: ...creen Figure 16 Pop up Toolbar Functions 4 2 1 2 Using the Menu Windows If the Menu button from the pop up toolbar is selected the Main Menu screen is opened The Main Menu screen allows the user to view the sensor status configure the sensor setup system setup and perform diagnostics The menu structure may vary depending on the configuration of the system MAIN MENU displays the Main Menu Structure...

Page 78: ...em until it is highlighted and press ENTER or double tap the highlighted item A keypad will be displayed to change an entry Figure 19 on page 25 or a list box will be displayed Figure 20 on page 26 Messages are displayed in the message window Figure 21 on page 26 If an entry is incorrect repeat the entry with the correct values If the entry is outside the working range a correction to the entry is...

Page 79: ...he entry or selection 1 Enters numbers or the character as shown on the button 45 Moves the cursor one position to the left or to the right 46 Increase Decrease a number or letter at the cursor position Keep the button pressed to change the numbers characters continuously 47 Deletes the character to the left of the cursor 48 CANCEL cancels the entry 49 ENTER confirms the entry or selection 1 2 3 4...

Page 80: ...ntry 51 ENTER confirms a selection 1 Scrolls up or down 52 Displays the messages or warnings 53 Displays details on the selected entry 54 This button changes back to the previous display 55 ENTER confirms an entry 56 CANCEL cancels an entry mg l g l ppm mE E m 1 FNU NTU 1 2 3 5 6 2 COMMUNICATION ERROR Ph 11f20030007 1 3 4 ...

Page 81: ...f events that occur on the devices such as configuration changes alarms warning conditions etc The data log and the event log can be read out in a CSV format For downloading the logs please refer to the controller user manual 5 3 Sensor Diagnostics Menu for pH and ORP Menu SELECT SENSOR if more than one sensor is attached STATUS ERROR LIST See section 7 1 on page 37 WARNING LIST See section 7 2 on...

Page 82: ... of days the sensor has been in operation Default notification at 365 days DEFAULT SETUP Resets all user editable options to their factory defaults DIAG TEST PROBE INFO Display the sensor type entered name of the sensor Default sensor serial number the sensor serial number the software version number and the sensor driver version number CAL DATA Displays the pH slope and the date of the last calib...

Page 83: ...r slope factor to be applied to the measured pH CAL DAYS Number of days since the last calibration Default notification at 60 days SENSOR DAYS Number of days the sensor has been in operation Default notification at 365 days IMPED LIMITS Set min max electrode sensor impedance limits DEFAULT SETUP Resets all user editable options to their factory defaults DIAG TEST PROBE INFO Display the sensor type...

Page 84: ...ut Mode Active Hold or Transfer and confirm 5 Move the clean probe to buffer and confirm to continue 6 Confirm when stable A screen will display 1 Point Auto Complete and the slope XX X mV pH 7 Return the probe to process 5 6 1 Two Point Automatic Calibration 1 From the Main Menu select SENSOR SETUP and confirm 2 Select the appropriate sensor if more than one is attached and confirm 3 Select CALIB...

Page 85: ...ble Edit the solution value and confirm 7 Move probe to solution 1 and confirm 8 Confirm when stable Edit the solution value and confirm 9 A screen will display 2 Point Manual Cal Complete and the slope XX X mV pH 10 Return the probe to process 5 7 ORP Calibration The manufacturer offers a one point manual calibration for ORP The value of the sample used in the manual calibration may be determined...

Page 86: ...eading for both sensors will flash The calibration for both sensors are now running in the background 5 To return to the calibration of either sensor select SENSOR SETUP from the Main Menu and confirm Select the appropriate sensor and confirm 6 The calibration in progress will be displayed Continue with the calibration 5 9 Adjusting the Temperature View or change the temperature using the steps be...

Page 87: ...sion hazard Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class 1 Division 2 DANGER Risque d explosion La substitution de composants peut rendre ce materiel inacceptable pour les emplacements de Classe 1 Division 2 6 1 Maintenance Schedule Maintenance Task 90 days Annually Clean the sensor1 x Inspect sensor for damage x Replace Salt Bridge and fill solution2 x Calibrate Sensor as required ...

Page 88: ... sensor for 2 to 3 minutes in the soap solution 4 Use a small soft bristle brush such as a toothbrush and scrub the entire measuring end of the sensor thoroughly cleaning the electrode and salt bridge surfaces If surface deposits cannot be removed by detergent solution cleaning use muriatic acid or other dilute acid to dissolve them The acid should be as dilute as possible Experience will determin...

Page 89: ...rotruding process electrode Properly discard the old salt bridge 2 Replace the standard cell solution in the sensor reservoir a Pour out the aged solution and thoroughly flush the reservoir with standard cell solution b Fill the reservoir to the bottom of the salt bridge mating threads with fresh standard cell solution Cat No 25M1A1025 115 3 Carefully thread the new salt bridge clockwise until it ...

Page 90: ...Visit us at www hach com Maintenance ...

Page 91: ... Codes Displayed Error Definition Resolution ADC FAILURE System measurement fails Contact Technical Consulting Services Table 7 Warning Codes Displayed Warning Definition Resolution PROBE OUT RANGE Measured pH ORP exceeds the expected value range Contact Technical Consulting Services TEMP OUT RANGE Measured temperature exceeds the expected value range Contact Technical Consulting Services FLASH FA...

Page 92: ... the digital gateway 2 Place the sensor in a pH 7 buffer Before continuing allow the temperatures of the sensor and buffer to equalize to approximately 25 C 70 F 3 Verify that the sensor temperature element 300 ohm thermistor is operating properly by measuring the resistance between the yellow and black wires The reading should be between 250 and 350 ohms at approximately 25 C 70 F 4 Reconnect the...

Page 93: ... If it is write down this millivolt value reading and perform step 4 If the reading is outside these limits discontinue this test and contact Technical Support 4 Rinse the sensor and place it in pH 4 or 10 buffer and allow the buffer and sensor to reach temperature equilibrium This can be verified by monitoring the sensor temperature value for a stable temperature measurement This value is located...

Page 94: ... allow the temperature of the sensor and reference solution to equalize to approximately 25 C 70 F 3 Verify that the sensor temperature element 300 ohm thermistor is operating by measuring the resistance between the yellow and black wires The reading should be between 250 and 350 ohms at approximately 25 C 70 F 4 Reconnect the yellow and black wires 5 Connect the multimeter lead to the red wire an...

Page 95: ...283656 Buffer pH 7 500 mL 1 pint 2283549 Cable interconnect unterminated ends specify length in whole feet each 1W1100 Cable sensor extension 1 m 3 ft each 6122400 Cable sensor extension 7 7 m 25 ft each 5796000 Cable sensor extension 15 m 50 ft each 5796100 Cable sensor extension 31 m 100 ft each 5796200 Connector Cable each 6139900 Instruction manual Differential pH System English each 6120218 P...

Page 96: ...Visit us at www hach com ...

Page 97: ...ou send an e mail to intl hach com or contact Hach Company World Headquarters Loveland Colorado U S A Telephone 970 669 3050 Fax 970 669 2932 Technical and Customer Service U S A only Hach Technical and Customer Service Department personnel are eager to answer questions about our products and their use Specialists in analytical methods they are happy to put their talents to work for you Call 1 800...

Page 98: ...800 227 4224 U S A only FAX 515 232 3835 In Canada Hach Sales Service Canada Ltd 1313 Border Street Unit 34 Winnipeg Manitoba R3H 0X4 800 665 7635 Canada only Telephone 204 632 5598 FAX 204 694 5134 E mail canada hach com In Latin America the Caribbean the Far East Indian Subcontinent Africa Europe or the Middle East Hach Company World Headquarters P O Box 389 Loveland Colorado 80539 0389 U S A Te...

Page 99: ...caused by any repair or attempted repair not authorized by Hach Company Any product not used in accordance with the instructions furnished by Hach Company Freight charges to return merchandise to Hach Company Freight charges on expedited or express shipment of warranted parts or product Travel fees associated with on site warranty repair This warranty contains the sole express warranty made by Hac...

Page 100: ...Visit us at www hach com ...

Page 101: ...0 4 3 1995 EN 61000 4 3 1996 Radiated RF Electromagnetic Field Immunity Criteria A IEC 1000 4 4 1995 EN 61000 4 4 1995 Electrical Fast Transients Burst Criteria B IEC 1000 4 5 1995 EN 61000 4 5 1995 Surge Criteria B IEC 1000 4 6 1996 EN 61000 4 6 1996 Conducted Disturbances Induced by RF Fields Criteria A IEC 1000 4 11 1994 EN 61000 4 11 1994 Voltage Dip Short Interruptions Criteria B Additional I...

Page 102: ...e could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency...

Page 103: ...rence electrodes R gas constant T temperature in Kelvin A H activity of the hydrogen ion assumed to be equivalent to the concentration of hydrogen ions F Faraday constant For every unit change in pH or decade change in ion concentration the emf of the electrode pair changes by 59 16 mV at 25 C This value is known as the Nernstian Slope of the electrode The pH electrode pair is calibrated using sol...

Page 104: ...trol output level assuming that Phase is set to Direct When the process is at pH 7 0 the proportional control will provide a 0 control output level When the process is at pH 6 5 the proportional control will provide a 50 output The output action is equal to the difference between the setpoint and the process value divided by the proportional band value Integral The integral value is used to reduce...

Page 105: ...t the setpoint The derivative setting is in minutes The output action of the derivative control is equal to the rate of change of the process in pH units per minute times the derivative time divided by the proportional band times negative one For example if the process pH is changing at a rate of pH 0 20 per minute the derivative time is set to 3 0 minutes the proportional band is set to pH 0 80 a...

Page 106: ...Visit us at www hach com ...

Page 107: ...Integer 1 R W Output mode Calibration CalLeave 40030 Integer 1 R W Cal leave mode Calibration CalAbort 40031 Integer 1 R W Cal abort mode Tags CalEditValueTag 40032 Integer 1 R Cal edit value tag Calibration CalEditPhValue 40033 Float 2 R W Cal edit value Diagnostics pHSlope 40035 Float 2 R pH slope Diagnostics SoftwareVersion 40037 String 6 R Software version Diagnostics SerialNumber 40043 String...

Page 108: ...Visit us at www hach com ...

Page 109: ...ror Codes 37 I Integral 50 Integral Reset 50 K Key Functions 21 L List box 25 M Maintenance Schedule 33 Menu command Marking 23 24 Menu windows 23 N Normal operation 23 P Parts Replacement 41 PID control Proportional 50 Proportional 50 Proportional Band 50 S Safety Information 7 Sensor Cable Connecting 11 Wiring 11 Specifications 5 T Toolbar 23 W Warnings 37 Warranty 45 ...

Page 110: ...Visit us at www hach com ...

Page 111: ... operation The preamp in the pHD analog sensor produces a strong signal enabling the sensor to be located up to 1000 m 3280 ft from the analyzer Durable Body Materials Both the digital and analog pH and ORP differential sensors feature a durable PEEK body for chemical compatibility with most process solutions For less aggressive solutions Hach offers a Ryton sensor in a convertible style for pH an...

Page 112: ...V per 24 hours non cumulative Operating Temperature Digital Sensor 5 to 70ºC 23 to 158ºF Analog Sensor with Digital Gateway 5 to 105ºC 23 to 221ºF Immersion Sensor 0 to 50ºC 32 to 122ºF Flow Rate 3 m 10 ft per second maximum Sensor Pressure Digital 6 9 bar at 70ºC Temperature Limits 100 psi at 158ºF Analog 6 9 bar at 105ºC 100 psi at 221ºF Built in Temperature NTC 300 ohm thermistor for Element an...

Page 113: ... pH Sensors Prod No Body Material Body Style Electrode Material Max Temp PD1P1 PEEK1 Convertible Glass General Purpose 95ºC 203ºF PD1P3 PEEK1 Convertible Glass HF resistant 95ºC 203ºF PD2P1 PEEK1 Insertion Glass General Purpose 95ºC 203ºF PD3P1 PEEK1 Sanitary Glass General Purpose 95ºC 203ºF PD1R1 Ryton2 Convertible Glass General Purpose 95ºC 203ºF PD1R3 Ryton2 Convertible Glass HF resistant 95ºC ...

Page 114: ...SB P2SV PEEK Sensor and Salt Bridge Body Ceramic Outer Junction SB P1SP1 PEEK Sensor and Salt Bridge Body Kynar PVDF Outer Junction SB R1SV RytonSensor and Salt Bridge Body Kynar PVDF Outer Junction 1Special perﬂuoroelastomer O ring in place of the Viton O ring pHD Sensor Reagents and Standards 25M1A1025 115 Standard Cell Solution 500 mL 25M8A1002 101 Gel Powder for high temperature applications 2...

Page 115: ......

Page 116: ...fety Appliances Company with respect to the product are voided if the product is not used and serviced in accordance with the instructions in this manual Please protect yourself and others by following them We encourage our cus tomers to write or call regarding this equipment prior to use or for any additional infor mation relative to use or repairs In North America to contact your nearest stockin...

Page 117: ...ranties of manufacturers of such components THIS WARRANTY IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESSED IMPLIED OR STATUTORY AND IS STRICTLY LIMITED TO THE TERMS HEREOF SELLER SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE 2 Exclusive Remedy It is expressly agreed that Purchaser s sole and exclusive remedy for breach of the above warranty for any torti...

Page 118: ...ly impair instrument performance Repair or alteration of the ModCon75 Controller beyond the scope of these maintenance instructions or by anyone other than authorized MSA service personnel could cause the product to fail to perform as designed and persons who rely on this product for their safety could sustain serious personal injury or loss of life 4 If a portion of the system fails remaining sys...

Page 119: ...ter 2 Mounting 2 1 Before Installation 2 1 Safety and Environmental Guideline 2 2 Mounting 2 2 Figure 2 1 Vision Connectors and Mounting Brackets 2 1 WARNING 2 2 Figure 2 2 ModCon75 Controller Panel Cut out Front View 2 3 Figure 2 3 Earth Assembly 2 3 Figure 2 4 Panel Mounted Rear View 2 4 RS232 to RS422 RS485 Isolated Universal Converter 2 5 Features 2 5 Figure 2 5 Function Diagram 2 5 Wiring Con...

Page 120: ...Supply 3 1 Earthing the Power Supply 3 2 Figure 3 1 Power Supply Wiring 3 2 WARNING 3 1 Chapter 4 I O Modules 4 1 Snap in I O Modules 4 1 Features 4 1 Installing a Snap in I O Module 4 1 Removing a Snap in I O Module 4 2 WARNING 4 1 User Safety and Equipment Protection Guidelines 4 2 Figure 4 1 Installing a Snap in I O Module 4 2 Environmental Considerations 4 3 Wiring 4 3 WARNING 4 3 Wiring Proce...

Page 121: ... 6 2 Figure 6 2 Main Menu Screen 6 2 F1 Add Units to Network 6 3 Figure 6 3 Password Entry 6 3 Figure 6 4 Add Units to the Network 6 4 Screen Displaying Node IDs Found 6 5 Figure 6 5 Node IDs Found 6 5 F2 Add Unit Setpoints 6 6 Figure 6 6 Allows Users to Set Enabled or Disabled Alarms 6 6 WARNING 6 6 Figure 6 7 Allows Users to Set Increasing or Decreasing Alarms 6 7 Figure 6 8 Allows users to Set ...

Page 122: ...rd Editor 6 15 F6 Modbus Alarms 6 16 Figure 6 20 Modbus Alarms 6 16 F7 Fault Status 6 17 Figure 6 21 Fault Status 6 17 F8 Zone Editor 6 18 Figure 6 22 Zone Editor Set Relays as Latched or Unlatched 6 18 F9 Remote Remote Relay Editor Optional Requires Remote Relay Modules 6 19 Optional Remote Relay units 6 19 Figure 6 23 Remote Relay Editor 6 19 WARNING 6 19 F10 Network Settings 6 20 Figure 6 24 F1...

Page 123: ...h MI599 Signed Integer B 9 Appendix C Remote Relay Modules C 1 Table C 1 Remote Relay Module Specifications C 2 Figure C 1 Power Supply pnp source Inputs C 4 Figure C 2 Relay Outputs C 4 Jumper Settings C 5 Table C 2 JP1 Digital Inputs Type C 5 Table C 3 JP2 Digital Inputs Voltage C 5 Table C 4 JP5 JP6 Power Supply Voltage C 5 Table C 5 JP3 Analog Input Type C 5 CAUTION C 5 Figure C 3 Shown Jumper...

Page 124: ...ogrammable logic controller with an integral operating panel offers Modbus communications and a real time clock operating panels contain a graphic LCD screen and a keypad The LCD screen displays operator instructions alarms real time variable system information Figure 1 1 The ModCon75 System ...

Page 125: ...strial applications requiring operator interface the ability to control small to medium processes according to time and ambient conditions Technical Description ModCon75 Controller Dimensions 260 x 155 x 72 mm 10 24 x 6 1 x 2 8 Mounting Panel mounted via brackets Power Supply 12 or 24 VDC controller unit 24 VDC for RS232 to RS485 converter Real time Clock RTC Enables time and date controlled funct...

Page 126: ...ch may be used to download programs from a PC establish communications with devices using RS232 protocol Additional Communication Port The additional communication channel has been set up with an Ethernet port NOTE Information regarding other communication options can be obtained from MSA Customer Service Programming This programming function should only be used by an authorized MSA Service Repres...

Page 127: ...tions An HMI application can typically include up to 255 Displays each with the ability to display text graphic images and variables Variables allow the user to display system data on the ModCon75 LCD screen bit integer and timer values times and dates I O status and values text from the variable text display list Variables can also use a graphic image or a bar graph to represent a value or range ...

Page 128: ...ch with an inserted screw Other items in the kit include an envelope containing a wire with a ring cable shoe other hardware that may be used to earth the controller s power supply a rubber seal already seated in back of the operating panel a communication cable two sets of keypad slides to be used for labeling the keypad keys One set of slides is already installed in the operating panel this manu...

Page 129: ...egular impact shocks or excessive vibration Do not place in water or allow water to leak onto the controller Do not allow debris to fall inside the unit during installation Do not touch live wires Double check all the wiring before turning ON the power supply Stay as far as possible from high voltage cables and power equipment Allow a minimum of 10 mm of space for ventilation between the top and b...

Page 130: ...plied with the controller kit b Scrape the panel paint away from the contact area to ensure a conductive connection c Drive the screw into the hole d On the screw s shank place the following hardware in this order washer ring cable shoe second washer spring and nut as shown in FIGURE 2 3 Figure 2 3 Earth Assembly Figure 2 2 ModCon75 Controller Panel Cut out Front View 2 3 ...

Page 131: ...sh the four mounting brackets into their slots on the sides of the controller as shown in FIGURE 2 1 5 Tighten the bracket screws against the panel When properly mounted the controller is squarely situated in the panel cut out as shown in FIGURE 2 4 Figure 2 4 Panel Mounted Rear View 2 4 ...

Page 132: ...tion of the data flow and switches the transmission direction comes in a standard sized housing snap mounts onto a 35 mm DIN rail screw terminal block connections are provided RJ11 connector provides easy plug in connection for the ModCon75 Controller supports networks containing up to 25 nodes enables full or half duplex communications uses a stand alone power supply has LED indicators Figure 2 5...

Page 133: ...aking connections Top Connectors Power Supply Terminals Rear connector 24 V Supply voltage 0V Reference supply voltage Earth to ground RS232 Terminals Front connector TXD RS232 transmit signal RXD RS232 receive signal 0V RS232 0V reference Figure 2 6 Top Connectors 2 6 ...

Page 134: ... connector TX RS485 negative transmit signal RX RS485 negative receive signal T Negative termination Front connector TX RS485 positive transmit signal RX RS485 positive receive signal T Positive termination Figure 2 7 Bottom Connectors 2 7 ...

Page 135: ...D TxD TxD RxD 0V 0V RS485 Wiring Considerations Use shielded twisted pair cables Configure the network as a multidrop bus network Minimize the stub drop length leading from each device to the bus Ideally the main cable should be run in and out of the networked device Do not cross positive A and negative B signals Positive terminals must be wired to positive Negative terminals must be wired to nega...

Page 136: ... the Rx and the Rx terminal to the Tx as shown in FIGURE 2 9 DIP Switch Settings The DIP switches are located on the top of the device control Data format transmission speed whether communications are half or full duplex Data can be transmitted in either 10 or 11 bit format Each format includes a start and stop bit The DIP switches are shown in FIGURE 2 10 a lowered switch is ON a raised switch is...

Page 137: ...0 feet Interface Connectors RJ11 or screw type 2 5 mm 2 terminal RS422 RS485 Input Voltage 7 to 12V differential maximum Cable Type Shielded twisted pair in compliance with EIA RS485 Cable Length 1200m maximum 4000 feet Interface Connector Screw type 2 5 mm 2 terminal GENERAL Isolation yes Size 110 8 L x 22 5 W x 75 H mm 4 38 L x 0 89 W x 2 96 H Dip Switch Setting S1 S2 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 OFF OFF OFF...

Page 138: ...ounting Snap mounts onto 35mm DIN rail EN50022 35 Flame Resistant UL94 VO ENVIRONMENTAL Storage Temperature 20 to 70 C Operating Temperature 0 to 50 C Storage Humidity 10 to 95 relative humidity Operating Humidity 5 to 95 relative humidity Figure 2 11 Mechanical Dimensions 2 11 ...

Page 139: ... pin In the event of voltage fluctuations or non conformity to voltage power supply specifications connect the device to a regulated power supply A technician or engineer trained in the local and national electrical standards must perform all tasks associated with the electrical wiring of the device Double check all wiring before turning ON the power supply FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE ABOVE CAN RESULT I...

Page 140: ...ng free Earthing the Power Supply To maximize system performance avoid electromagnetic interference by mounting the controller on a metal panel earthing the controller s power supply by connecting the chassis signal to the panel connecting the tapered end to the power supply as shown in FIGURE 3 1 NOTE The wire used to earth the power supply must not exceed 8 cm in length If your conditions do not...

Page 141: ...speed counter inputs type pnp npn source sink 10 isolated relay outputs Four isolated pnp npn source sink transistor outputs Three analog inputs not used in this application To avoid electric shock turn OFF power to the unit before installing I O modules Installing a Snap in I O Module Snap in I O Modules can be installed before or after mounting the unit The protective cap covering the I O connec...

Page 142: ... connector User Safety and Equipment Protection Guidelines Dispose of this product in accordance with local and national standards and regulations Only qualified service personnel should open this device or perform repairs This document is intended to aid trained and competent personnel in the installation of this equipment as defined by the European directives for machinery low voltage and EMC On...

Page 143: ...operly secured in place Environmental Considerations Do not install the unit in areas with excessive or conductive dust corrosive or flammable gas moisture or rain excessive heat regular impact shocks excessive vibration Provide proper ventilation by leaving at least 10 mm of space between the top and bottom edges of the device and the enclosure walls Do not place in water or let water leak onto t...

Page 144: ... that might cause the wire strand to break Install at maximum distance from high voltage cables and power equipment I O Wiring General Input or output cables should not be run through the same multi core cable share the same wire Allow for voltage drop and noise interference with input lines used over an extended distance Use wire that is properly sized for the load Digital Inputs Each group of ei...

Page 145: ...ply specifications connect the device to a regulated power supply Do not connect the Neutral or Line signal of the 110 220 VAC to the device s 0V pin Relay Outputs The relay output 0 volt signal is isolated from the controller 0 volt signal I0 Unlatch Zone 1 I6 Unlatch Zone I1 Unlatch Zone 27 I7 Unlatch Zone 8 I2 Unlatch Zone 3 I8 Unlatch Zone 9 I3 Unlatch Zone 4 I11 Remote Sensor Acknowledge I4 U...

Page 146: ... by reverse EMF connect a clamping diode in parallel with each inductive DC load an RC snubber circuit in parallel with each inductive AC load O0 Zone 1 Alarm O5 Zone 6 Alarm O1 Zone 2 Alarm O6 Zone 7 Alarm O2 Zone 3 Alarm O7 Zone 8 Alarm O3 Zone 4 Alarm O8 Zone 9 Alarm O4 Zone 5 Alarm O9 Horn Relay Figure 4 3 Relay Outputs 4 6 ...

Page 147: ...ication uses transistor output O11 for FAULT indication NOTE The FAULT indication is normally energized and is deactivated when a fault occurs The ModCon75 Controller application uses O12 for an internal timer which toggles at a rate of 0 5 seconds ON and 0 5 seconds OFF 1 Hz This can be used for external monitoring of the controller operational status Figure 4 4 Increasing Contact Life Span 4 7 ...

Page 148: ...Figure 4 5 Transistor Outputs 4 8 ...

Page 149: ...e as a high speed counter input shaft encoder Resolution 32 bit Frequency 10 kHz maximum Minimum Pulse Width 40 μs RELAY Number of Outputs 10 See NOTE 3 OUTPUTS Output Type Normally de energized SPST NO relay 230 VAC 24 VDC Type of Relay Takamisawa Fujitsu JY 24H K or NAIS Matsushita JQ1AP 24V or OMRON G6B 1114P 24VDC Galvanic Isolation Yes Output Current Resistive Load 5 A maximum per output 8 A ...

Page 150: ...urrent 150 mA per group Maximum Frequency Resistive Load 20 Hz Inductive Load 0 5 Hz ON Voltage Drop pnp 0 5 VDC max npn 0 85 VDC max Short Circuit Protection Yes pnp only Power Supply Operating Voltage 20 4 to 28 8 VDC Power Supply Nominal Operating Voltage 24 VDC npn sink Power Supply 3 5 V to 28 8 VDC unrelated to Remote Operating Voltage Relay Module voltage or Controller voltage ENVIRON Opera...

Page 151: ...vice Representative Communicating to the RS232 to RS485 converter which communicates to the Ultima X3 units The RS232 interface is via RJ 11 type serial ports located on the side of the controller NOTE Turn OFF power before making communications connections NOTE Do not connect the controller directly to a telephone or telephone line Figure 5 1 RS232 Port Printout Standard programming cables do not...

Page 152: ...to the controller s 0V this is the same 0V used by the power supply The RJ 11 type serial port located on the side of the controller must always be used with an appropriate adapter The RS232 serial port is not isolated 5 2 ...

Page 153: ...Chapter 6 Operating Instructions Power up Screen This screen appears when power is applied to the ModCon75 Controller Figure 6 1 Power up Screen 6 1 ...

Page 154: ...view only all alarm settings F5 Password Editor Two password levels MSA Default and User programmable default 0 F6 Modbus Alarms Displays communication status F7 Sensor Fault Automatically appears if Ultima X3 transmitter enters a fault condition F8 Zones Editor Zone relays can be configured for latch unlatch OFF ON delay and delays of up to 15 minutes F9 Remote I O Editor Activate only when optio...

Page 155: ...read all units on the network F14 Select F14 once the following three steps are completed 1 all Ultima X3 sensors up to 25 X3 transmitters with up to three sensors each are wired to the network and have unique IDs 2 network IDs are set by the Ultima Controller P N 809086 Valid IDs are 2 26 NOTE ID 0 is the broadcast modbus message ID 1 is the ModCon75 address 3 Baud rate 19200 and Parity even This...

Page 156: ... view results NOTE If changes are made to individual X3 units through the use of the Ultima Controller user must run F14 to repopulate the registry Populating the registry will change the setpoints in the ModCon75 Controller to match the setpoints and configuration of all sensors on the network Figure 6 4 Add Units to the Network 6 4 ...

Page 157: ...nits in register list NOTE Verify that the ModCon75 Controller found all Ultima X3 units on the network If the total number is less than the actual number on the network check your wiring and make sure that each X3 on the network has it s own unique address in the range of 2 through 26 Figure 6 5 Node IDs Found 6 5 ...

Page 158: ... key When all desired changes are made press F6 to advance to the next settings screen Repeat this procedure for other sensor option screens FIGURES 6 7 and 6 8 If the user changes a sensor the ModCon75 Controller will retain the setpoints of the previous sensor To upload new setpoints the user must populate the sensors through the F1 menu option Improper setpoints can result in exposure to hazard...

Page 159: ...f the Ultima X3 unit For latching an alarm on the ModCon75 Controller use a Zone relay and program it for latching A latched relay at the Ultima X3 unit may be cleared at the ModCon75 Controller by pressing the down arrow key Figure 6 8 Allows users to Set Latching Non latching Alarms Figure 6 7 Allows Users to Set Increasing or Decreasing Alarms 6 7 ...

Page 160: ...O3 Zone 4 Output 08 Zone 9 Output O4 Zone 5 Output 09 Horn Relay The Horn relay Output O9 is used for remote alarms sounds a horn on any caution warning or alarm condition Silence of Horn is accomplished by connecting a push button to I12 terminals and or by pressing the button located on the front panel Figure 6 9 Allows Users to Assign Zone Control Relays to Caution Warning and Alarm Setpoints f...

Page 161: ...int values The screen will display Current Values for Unit for Sensor 1 presets ENTER enables user to change presets NOTE Do not use decimal points the Decimal is fixed therefore to enter 19 5 Press ENTER Type 19 and ENTER Type 5 and ENTER Figure 6 11 Sensor 1 Preset Screen Figure 6 10 Current Set point values Read from the Selected Ultima X3 Unit 6 9 ...

Page 162: ...E above F6 Skips to next screen ENTER Changes presets NOTE The ModCon75 Controller displays to one decimal point With certain sensors ClO2 CO2 etc alarm setpoints in the Ultima X3 unit may be represented to two decimal points In this Figure 6 13 Sensor 3 Preset Screen Figure 6 12 Sensor 2 Preset Screen 6 10 ...

Page 163: ...ons located on back of unit to activate according to caution warning or alarm settings set on the Choose Zone event screen Verifies that all values were sent successfully NOTE If user does not press F7 the changes will not be made Combustible sensors cannot be set to a range of 61 100 Figure 6 14 Displays all Presets before Downloading to the Unit 6 11 ...

Page 164: ...opulate the registry Populating the registry will change the setpoints in the ModCon75 Controller to match the setpoints and configuration of all sensors on the network Failure to follow the above instructions can result in the ModCon75 Controller not properly indicating a sensor alarm fault condition WARNING Figure 6 15 Verification Screen 6 12 ...

Page 165: ...e reading each node Typical Display shows three sensors on the ModCon 75 Controller All Clear shows all three sensors are not in alarm Box in lower right corner shows ModBus network sensor status Current values are shown next to sensor number ESC Back to Main screen Figure 6 17 All Clear Status Screen Figure 6 16 Main Data Screen 6 13 ...

Page 166: ...F4 Display Setpoints view only Screen does not allow changing presets Accesses screen showing presets for Sensor 1 Figure 6 18 Display Only Setpoints 6 14 ...

Page 167: ...F5 Password Editor F1 Password Default is MSA default password F2 Default Password is 0 User can change this password to protect against unauthorized changes Figure 6 19 Password Editor 6 15 ...

Page 168: ...ws Modbus failures and identifies failed unit node Fault screen will stay active after five minutes and then return to the Main Menu screen User can also press ESC to return to the Main Menu screen Figure 6 20 Modbus Alarms 6 16 ...

Page 169: ...rn to the Main Menu screen User can also press ESC to return to the Main Menu screen The ModCon 75 will display the following Ultima X3 sensor faults LOC Over range Quick under range Under range Sensor missing Sensor End of Life Calibration fault Power Fail fault Configuration reset All other faults are shown as General Fault Figure 6 21 Fault Status 6 17 ...

Page 170: ...atch Zone 9 I4 Unlatch Zone 5 I11 Ultima X3 monitor acknowledge I12 Horn silence F6 Skips to next screen When zone relays are set as unlatched then Zone relays can be set to On Delay or Off Delay On Delay relay activates only if alarm exists for the set time Off Delay Typically used for fan control relay stays energized for the set delay time after the alarm condition clears NOTE Selecting latchin...

Page 171: ...otal of four remote relay units may be added to the modbus network see Appendix C for additional details Modbus ID numbers of the remote relay modules must be programmed for ID 30 31 32 or 33 Input Remote Relay on all remote units is the local silence alarm Closing this input will silence the local alarm as well as the ModCon75 Alarm Output O0 is for the local alarm output Note If Zone Alarms are ...

Page 172: ...Zone 6 Alarm Input I0 Local area silence ID 33 Output O0 Local horn output Output O1 Zone 7 Alarm Output O2 Zone 8 Alarm Input I0 Local area silence Example Program ID 5 sensor 1 caution alarm to zone 1 Therefore if Sensor 1 caution alarm occurs this will trip the ModCon75 Zone 1 output O0 as well as the remote relay module ID 30 output O1 F10 Network Settings For Ethernet capability enter IP Addr...

Page 173: ... screen contrast Labeling Keys Most controller keys can be labeled 1 Before mounting the controller insert keypad slides into the slots under the cover of the operating panel Keypad slides are strips of plastic cut to fit under specific groups of keys 2 Write print text onto a slide and insert in the appropriate slot Text should be visible through the operating panel covering A special slide is pr...

Page 174: ...g Slides Slides can be labeled with a fine tip permanent marker or professional labeling tool Removing and Inserting Slides To access slides move the rubber seal seated in back of the operating panel Slides fit tightly into the operating panel slots to keep the label over the correct key Avoid use of excessive force when removing or inserting slides in order not to damage the slides Removing a Sli...

Page 175: ...splay Resolution 128 x 64 pixels 240 x 64 pixels 320 x 240 pixels QVGA KEYPAD 24 Number of Keys 33 27 including soft keys and alphanumeric keypad Key Type Metal dome sealed membrane Slides Provided for picture alphanumeric keypad and FUNCTION keys COMMU RS232 2 ports NICATION Isolation No Voltage Limits 20 V RS485 1 port via converter Isolation No Ultima X3 Nodes Up to 25 DIMENSIONS Size See FIGUR...

Page 176: ...Figure 8 1 Dimensions 8 2 ...

Page 177: ...ics com download htm or through an ethernet server provided by the third party vendor Using the OPC server the following will apply Mapping of variables Name Modcon75 IP Address 192 168 1 11 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway 192 168 1 254 Retrieving gas value for specific sensor Value is split into two registries For example ID 2 sensor 1 MI300 provides value to the left of the decimal point MI325...

Page 178: ... INTEGERS 273 DECID 2 Fault status message number 274 DECID 3 Fault status message number 275 DECID 4 Fault status message number 276 DECID 5 Fault status message number 277 DECID 6 Fault status message number 278 DECID 7 Fault status message number 279 DECID 8 Fault status message number 280 DECID 9 Fault status message number 281 DECID 10 Fault status message number 282 DECID 11 Fault status mes...

Page 179: ... 306 DECID 8 Sensor 1 A 307 DECID 9 Sensor 1 A 308 DECID 10 Sensor 1 A 309 DECID 11 Sensor 1 A 310 DECID 12 Sensor 1 A 311 DECID 13 Sensor 1 A 312 DECID 14 Sensor 1 A 313 DECID 15 Sensor 1 A 314 DECID 16 Sensor 1 A 315 DECID 17 Sensor 1 A 316 DECID 18 Sensor 1 A 317 DECID 19 Sensor 1 A 318 DECID 20 Sensor 1 A 319 DECID 21 Sensor 1 A 320 DECID 22 Sensor 1 A 321 DECID 23 Sensor 1 A 322 DECID 24 Sens...

Page 180: ...or 2 A 351 DECID 3 Sensor 2 A 352 DECID 4 Sensor 2 A 353 DECID 5 Sensor 2 A 354 DECID 6 Sensor 2 A 355 DECID 7 Sensor 2 A 356 DECID 8 Sensor 2 A 357 DECID 9 Sensor 2 A 358 DECID 10 Sensor 2 A 359 DECID 11 Sensor 2 A 360 DECID 12 Sensor 2 A 361 DECID 13 Sensor 2 A 362 DECID 14 Sensor 2 A 363 DECID 15 Sensor 2 A 364 DECID 16 Sensor 2 A 365 DECID 17 Sensor 2 A 366 DECID 18 Sensor 2 A 367 DECID 19 Sen...

Page 181: ...2 B 393 DECID 20 Sensor 2 B 394 DECID 21 Sensor 2 B 395 DECID 22 Sensor 2 B 396 DECID 23 Sensor 2 B 397 DECID 24 Sensor 2 B 398 DECID 25 Sensor 2 B 399 DECID 26 Sensor 2B 400 DECID 2 Sensor 3 A 401 DECID 3 Sensor 3 A 402 DECID 4 Sensor 3 A 403 DECID 5 Sensor 3 A 404 DECID 6 Sensor 3 A 405 DECID 7 Sensor 3 A 406 DECID 8 Sensor 3 A 407 DECID 9 Sensor 3 A 408 DECID 10 Sensor 3 A 409 DECID 11 Sensor 3...

Page 182: ... Sensor 3 B 436 DECID 13 Sensor 3 B 437 DECID 14 Sensor 3 B 438 DECID 15 Sensor 3 B 439 DECID 16 Sensor 3 B 440 DEC ID 17 Sensor 3 B 441 DEC ID 18 Sensor 3 B 442 DEC ID 19 Sensor 3 B 443 DEC ID 20 Sensor 3 B 444 DEC ID 21 Sensor 3 B 445 DEC ID 22 Sensor 3 B 446 DEC ID 23 Sensor 3 B 447 DEC ID 24 Sensor 3 B 448 DEC ID 25 Sensor 3 B 449 DEC ID 26 Sensor 3B 450 DECFault status ID 2 451 DECFault statu...

Page 183: ...1 Current Alarm Status ID 10 534 DEC Sensor 1 Current Alarm Status ID 11 535 DEC Sensor 1 Current Alarm Status ID 12 536 DEC Sensor 1 Current Alarm Status ID 13 537 DEC Sensor 1 Current Alarm Status ID 14 538 DEC Sensor 1 Current Alarm Status ID 15 539 DEC Sensor 1 Current Alarm Status ID 16 540 DEC Sensor 1 Current Alarm Status ID 17 541 DEC Sensor 1 Current Alarm Status ID 18 542 DEC Sensor 1 Cu...

Page 184: ...Sensor 3 Current Alarm Status ID 2 576 DEC Sensor 3 Current Alarm Status ID 3 577 DEC Sensor 3 Current Alarm Status ID 4 578 DEC Sensor 3 Current Alarm Status ID 5 579 DEC Sensor 3 Current Alarm Status ID 6 580 DEC Sensor 3 Current Alarm Status ID 7 581 DEC Sensor 3 Current Alarm Status ID 8 582 DEC Sensor 3 Current Alarm Status ID 9 583 DEC Sensor 3 Current Alarm Status ID 10 584 DEC Sensor 3 Cur...

Page 185: ...f True Sensor End of Life Sensor 1 11 Set if True Sensor End of Life Sensor 2 12 Set if True Sensor End of Life Sensor 3 13 Set if True Configuration Reset 14 Set if True Sign 15 Always 0 Bit 15 Set NAME BITS FUNCTION DESCRIPTION LOC Sensor 1 0 Set if True LOC Sensor 2 1 Set if True LOC Sensor 3 2 Set if True Over Range Sensor 1 3 Set if True Over Range Sensor 2 4 Set if True Over Range Sensor 3 5...

Page 186: ...alibration Calibration Active Sensor 3 3 Set During Calibration Warm Up Mode 4 Set During Startup Low Alarm Active 5 Set While Alarm Relay is Active Mid Alarm Active 6 Set While Alarm Relay is Active High Alarm Active 7 Set While Alarm Relay is Active Future 8 Future 9 Future 10 Future 11 Future 12 Future 13 Future 14 Not Used 15 Function Description MI525 through MI599 Signed Integer 0 Normal Ope...

Page 187: ...or ID 30 31 32 or 33 Input Remote Relay on all remote units is the local silence alarm Closing this input will silence the local alarm as well as the ModCon75 Alarm Output O0 is for the local alarm output NOTE If Zone Alarms are programmed as Latch user can silence the alarm at the remote relay but the Zone alarm will not clear until the unlatch input is initiated at the ModCon75 Controller C 1 ...

Page 188: ... mA 12 VDC 8 mA 24 VDC INPUT IMPEDANCE 3 K Ω RESPONSE TIME except high speed inputs 10 mS typical GALVANIC ISOLATION None INPUT CABLE LENGTH Up to 100 meters unshielded DIGITAL OUTPUTS 6 relay outputs 230 VAC 12 24 VDC OUTPUT TYPE SPST NO relay RELAY TYPE Takamisawa Fujitsu JY 12H K or NAIS Matsushita JQ1A 12 V or OMRON G6B 1114P 12 VDC ISOLATION By relay OUTPUT CURRENT 5 A max resistive load 1 A ...

Page 189: ... for RTC and system data WEIGHT 310 g 10 9 oz OPERATIONAL TEMPERATURE 0 to 50 C 32 to 12 F STORAGE TEMPERATURE 20 to 60 C 4 to 140 F RELATIVE HUMIDITY RH 5 to 95 non condensing MOUNTING METHOD DIN rail mounted IP20 NEMA 1 Panel mounted IP65 NEMA 4X NOTES 1 All 10 inputs can be set to pnp source or npn sink via a single jumper and appropriate wiring 2 All 10 inputs can function in 12 VDC or 24 VDC ...

Page 190: ...nput 10 Input 10 Input 10 Common Common Common Common Local area silence Local area silence Local area silence Local area silence Figure C 2 Relay Outputs NOTE To avoid electromagnetic interference mount the controller in a metal panel cabinet and earth the power supply Earth the power supply signal to the metal via wire 10 cm or shorter If conditions do not permit this do not earth the power supp...

Page 191: ...r settings and wiring connections may severely damage the controller Table C 2 JP1 Digital Inputs Type TO USE AS JP1 npn sink A pnp source B Table C 3 JP2 Digital Inputs Voltage TO USE AS JP2 12 VDC A 24 VDC B Table C 4 JP5 JP6 Power Supply Voltage TO USE AS JP5 JP6 10 2 to 15 6 VDC A A 15 6 to 28 8 VDC B B Table C 5 JP3 Analog Input Type TO USE AS JP3 Voltage input default A Current input B CAUTI...

Page 192: ...Figure C 3 Shown Jumper Settings Cause the Controller to Function as Follows DIGITAL INPUTS npn 24 VDC inputs ANALOG INPUT Voltage input POWER SUPPLY 24 VDC C 6 ...

Page 193: ...ur slots on the side of the enclosure 2 Using the blade of a flat blade screwdriver gently pry off the back of the controller FIGURE C 4 exposing the controller s board Figure C 4 Opening the Controller Enclosure C 7 ...

Page 194: ...ng DataXport s companion application DataXls and the data can then be exported to Excel files Via DataXport you can View alarm and fault events logged within the controller Access PLCs and log events via a direct network Ethernet or modem connection To download this application tool go to www msanorthamerica com select Fixed Gas Detection Instruments then Software Downloads The DataXport User s Gu...

Page 195: ......

Page 196: ...nties made by Mine Safety Appliances Company with respect to the product are voided if the product is not used and serviced in accordance with the instructions in this manual Please protect yourself and others by following them We encourage our customers to write or call regarding this equipment prior to use or for any additional information relative to use or repairs IN the U S to contact your ne...

Page 197: ...omponents THIS WARRANTY IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESSED IMPLIED OR STATUTORY AND IS STRICTLY LIMITED TO THE TERMS HEREOF SELLER SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANT ABILITY OR OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE 2 Exclusive Remedy It is expressly agreed that Purchaser s sole and exclusive remedy for breach of the above warranty for any tortious conduct of Seller or for any ...

Page 198: ...etting the Controller for an Ultima or Ultima X Series Instrument 1 5 Setting the Internal TIME of the Controller 1 5 Setting the Internal DATE of the Controller 1 6 When Sending a Command to the Ultima Ultima X Series Gas Monitor 1 6 Note on Resetting latched Alarms 1 7 Chapter 2 Calibration 2 1 Equipment Required 2 1 WARNING 2 2 Span Gas Values 2 2 WARNING 2 2 Table 2 1 Factory set Span Values 2...

Page 199: ...eration 3 1 Viewing the Ultima Gas Monitor Display Modes 3 1 Table 3 1 see Procedures The Controller Can Change the Display to Show 3 1 To View the Status of the Monitor 3 2 Procedures see TABLE 3 1 3 3 Procedure 1 Setting the Average Time Interval 3 3 To Change the Average Time Interval 3 3 Procedure 2 Setting the Span Value 3 3 To Change the Calibration Span Gas Value of the Ultima Sensor 3 3 To...

Page 200: ... Signal 3 12 To enable or disable the calibration output signal 3 12 Procedure 9 Setting the Number of Days Between Ultima Gas Monitor Auto calibration Periods 3 13 Setting Time that Ultima Gas Monitor Auto calibration is to begin 3 13 Procedure 10 Setting the Date of the Next Scheduled Ultima Gas Monitor Calibration 3 14 Procedure 11 Changing the MUX Address 3 14 To Change the Address 3 15 Proced...

Page 201: ...Program 0 3 21 Section 4 Maintenance 4 1 WARNING 4 1 Batteries 4 1 Determining a Low Battery Condition on the Ultima Controller 4 1 To Determine if Battery Replacement is Necessary 4 1 Replacing the Batteries 4 1 To Install New Batteries in the Ultima Controller 4 1 Determining a Low Battery Condition on the Ultima Calibrator 4 2 To Install New Batteries in the Ultima Calibrator 4 2 Service 4 3 Tr...

Page 202: ...ma Ultima X Calibrator FIGURE 1 1 Is a hand held self contained unit powered by two internal AAA batteries Allows one person nonintrusive calibration of an Ultima Ultima X Series Gas Monitor enabling the Monitor to be calibrated at the unit without opening the enclosure Is listed as Intrinsically Safe for Classification I Groups B C and D Division 1 Hazardous Locations Can select the multiplex add...

Page 203: ...as Monitor requires both a zero and span check gas 3 ADDRESS Button Displays or changes the multiplex address on the Ultima Ultima X Series Monitor if so equipped To Operate All Ultima Calibrator operations are performed by simply pointing the Calibrator at the Ultima Ultima X Series Gas Monitor display from a distance of no greater than six inches FIGURE 1 2 Communication to the Ultima Ultima X S...

Page 204: ...fication I Groups B C and D Division 1 Hazardous Locations Can select the following on an Ultima Ultima X Gas Monitor Set Monitor time and date Set the average interval Set display span gas value Set display alarms Display minimum maximum and average gas readings Enable calibration output signal Configure auto calibration feature Display previous calibration date Set display address Mimic Calibrat...

Page 205: ...the ENTER button The unit enters the READY mode and saves the ID password required for future operation To Disable the Password ID 1 With the unit OFF press and hold the ENTER button until the display prompts ID KEY 2 Using the NUMBER buttons enter the old ID number 3 After entering the four digit number press the ENTER button The display prompts NEW KEY 4 Enter 9999 and press the ENTER button The...

Page 206: ...2 Press the DISPLAY button once Display prompts 0 ULTMA 1 ULTMX 3 Enter 0 to set the controller for an Ultima instrument or 1 to set the controller for an Ultima X Series instrument a If your entry is valid the controller will display ULTIMA READY or ULTIMAX READY b If your entry is invalid it will not be accepted Start this procedure again to change the controller type Setting the Internal TIME o...

Page 207: ... date or press the CLEAR button to cancel and start this procedure again The DEL button allows for correction during entry When Sending a Command to the Ultima Ultima X Series Gas Monitor 1 The Controller must be READY prior to any key press 2 To change any function on the Ultima Ultima X Series Gas Monitor point the top of the controller directly at the clear face of the sensor FIGURE 1 2 and pre...

Page 208: ...If an Ultima Ultima X Series Gas Monitor has an active latched alarm the next IR command it receives from a calibration device will reset the latched alarm if it is not beyond the alarm threshold The intended IR command will be ignored and interpreted as an alarm reset When the latching alarm function is inactive other valid IR commands may be use 1 7 ...

Page 209: ...on components During the calibration it is necessary to quickly apply the span gas to the unit Prior connection of the calibration components will aid in ease of unit calibration Equipment Required Three calibration kits numbered 40 41 and 54 see FIGURES 2 1 2 2 and 2 3 are available from MSA for diffusion Ultima Ultima X Series Gas Monitors Kit 40 41 and 54 are housed in a convenient carrying cas...

Page 210: ...41533 is shipped with the product These calibration kits contain zero caps to use in place of zero calibration gas These caps can only be used when the ambient air does not contain the gas the monitor is detecting If there is any doubt use zero gas when zeroing the Ultima X Monitor otherwise improper calibration could occur Span Gas Values The Ultima Ultima X Monitor is factory shipped with a pres...

Page 211: ...s Hydrogen Cyanide 0 50 PPM 10 PPM 10028072 41 30 minutes Hydrogen Fluoride 7 0 10 PPM 8 PPM 10028070 41 30 minutes Chlorine Dioxide 4 0 3 PPM 1 PPM 710331 41 30 minutes Oxygen 0 5 5 493580 40 15 minutes 0 25 20 8 10028028 2 40 15 minutes Natural Gas 3 0 100 LEL 25 LEL 1 10028034 40 15 minutes Petroleum Vapors 3 0 100 LEL 40 LEL 1 10028034 40 15 minutes Gasoline General Solvents 3 0 100 LEL 55 LEL...

Page 212: ...le Gas it is good practice to calibrate unit with gas to be detected 4 ClO2 is calibrated with Cl2 or use ClO2 Calibrator Kit P N 710420 5 Methane IR is calibrated with 50 LEL Methane 6 ETO is calibrated with SO2 7 Hydrogen Fluoride HF is calibrated with Sulfur Dioxide SO2 10 PPM SO2 8 PPM HF Figure 2 1 Calibration Kit 40 Contents Your Kit may also include one or two gas cylinders Item 2 Zero Cap ...

Page 213: ...or two gas cylinders Item 5 Calibration Cap P N 10020030 Item 6 Zero Cap P N 710535 Item 3 Calibration Cap P N 710411 Item 4 Zero Cap P N 813774 Item 2 25 LPM Flow Controller P N 478359 Item 1 Tubing P N 711112 3 16 side connects to Item 2 1 4 side connects to sensor 2 5 ...

Page 214: ...NOTE Item 5 P N 10066581 is used only for SAFEMTX Calibration Item 4 Desiccant P N 10064306 Item 5 Calibration Cover Assembly P N 10066581 Item 2 Zero Cap P N 710535 Item 3 1 5 LPM Flow Regulator P N 478358 Item 1 Tubing P N 711112 3 16 side connects to Item 2 1 4 side connects to sensor 2 6 ...

Page 215: ... gas value accordingly 1 1 1 Trichloroethane 32 Ethylene Oxide 36 Acetic Acid 28 Freon 152A 28 Acetone 37 Gasoline 35 Acrolein 28 Hexane 40 Acrylonitrile 26 Isoprene 33 Allyl chloride 30 Methyl Acetate 34 Benzene 37 Methyl chloride 32 Butane n 36 Methyl Propene 2 29 Butane iso 32 Methyl t Butyl Ether 35 Butanol iso 38 Pentane n 36 Butene 1 34 Pentane iso 36 Butene 2 37 Pentene 35 Butyl Acetate n 2...

Page 216: ...ect the following gases recalibrate with 0 6 propane and set the span gas value accordingly Acetone 86 Isoproponal 25 Butadiene 1 3 80 MEK 53 Cyclohexane 14 Methane 50 Ethanol 17 Methanol 14 Ethyl Acetate 34 Methyl Formate 13 Ethylene 95 Propylene 39 Heptane 14 Toluene 64 Hexane 14 Xylenes 53 IsoButanol 20 CATEGORY 35 FOR ULTIMA IR NON METHANE To detect the following gases recalibrate with 0 6 pro...

Page 217: ... of the gas or vapor being measured the expected span gas value of the Ultima Ultima X Series Gas Monitor can be changed by the Ultima Controller Ultima Ultima X Series Gas Monitor Calibration To ensure a fully functional sensor perform calibration checks and adjustments at initial start up and at regular intervals As with any type of gas monitor the only true check of its performance is to apply ...

Page 218: ...hrough the flow control regulator and tubing for five minutes before attempting a calibration After a successful calibration flush the flow control regulator and tubing with 100 Nitrogen for five minutes Store the flow control regulator in the desiccated bag included in Calibration Kit 54 or equivalent dry container INITIAL Calibration When a new sensor is placed in the Ultima Gas Monitor an INITI...

Page 219: ...s the user through the zero and span routines as in a regular calibration NOTE This procedure should be initiated only when a new sensor element is installed Otherwise the sensor end of life indication may not be accurate Regular Calibration A regular calibration includes a zero and span as described in the following procedures If the user chooses to only perform a zero they may do so by pressing ...

Page 220: ... Monitor display and press the Controller Calibrator CAL CALIBRATE button The display shows A countdown from 30 to 0 seconds APPLY ZERO GAS NOTE The zero or calibration process can be aborted at any time during the 30 second countdown interval simply press the ZERO CAL or ADDRESS button on the Controller Calibrator while aiming it at the unit NOTE The 30 second countdown interval is omitted for ox...

Page 221: ...r allows automatic zero adjustment only within a pre defined range It cannot make corrections outside this range such as when an empty or wrong cylinder of gas is applied or failure to begin gas flow within the allotted 30 second countdown occurs If only a ZERO was performed the procedure is complete and the user should return the calibration equipment to the cal kit If a CAL was performed the gas...

Page 222: ...en connect the end of the tubing over the sensor inlet and push the calibration cap over the entire sensor inlet see FIGURE 2 8 c Cal Kit 54 Run HCL gas through the regulator and tubing for five minutes before attempting a calibration 11 Turn ON the gas flow by turning the flow controller knob It is good practice to have all calibration components previously assembled Ensure that any calibration g...

Page 223: ...f the calibration is successful the display will show END for approximately two seconds FIGURE 2 7 No user adjustments are necessary The display shows the span gas value while the span gas is flowing to the unit For example it may read 60 PPM or 25 or 60 LEL 13 Turn OFF gas flow by turning the knob on the flow controller If the calibration output signal is enabled during calibration it will be hel...

Page 224: ...ng Cal Kit 54 after a successful calibration flush the flow control regulator and tubing with 100 Nitrogen for five minutes Return the flow control regulator and tubing to the desiccated bag included in Cal Kit 54 or equivalent dry container Dedicate this flow control regulator and tubing for HCL gas use only OXYGEN Calibration NOTE If this is the first calibration after the sensor element is repl...

Page 225: ...Normally any degradation of the sensor s performance is associated with slight drifts in its zero response which in turn will adversely affect its span performance Restoring the sensor s zero is typically sufficient to restore its span performance A zero adjustment is performed by pressing the ZERO button on the Calibrator or Controller and following the Zeroing instructions given earlier in this ...

Page 226: ...1 over last average time interval Time interval for minimum 1 HOUR 1 maximum average gas reading Zero gas concentration value N A N A Sensor Range N A 3 Gas Table Value 1 4 Span gas concentration value see TABLE 1 2 Alarm 1 2 3 setpoints DISABLED Ultima 5 ENABLED Ultima X 5 IF ENABLED Alarm 1 10 full scale 5 Alarm 2 20 full scale 5 Alarm 3 30 full scale 5 Oxygen Alarm 1 19 5 5 Oxygen Alarm 2 18 0 ...

Page 227: ...s of the Monitor To view any of the display modes listed above such as current time or date perform the following 1 Turn the unit ON by pressing the ENTER button wait until the READY prompt displays 2 Press the SEND button The display prompts SEND 3 Press the DISPLAY button The display prompts Sel Dsp Item 4 Press the or button to scroll through the available list as described above 5 When the des...

Page 228: ...aim the controller at the sensor and press the ENTER button The Monitor will show the time interval selected for five seconds The Monitor time interval is now set to the desired selection The Monitor displays the average minimum or maximum gas concentration reading over the selected interval This reading is updated at the end of the selected average interval Procedure 2 Setting the Span Value Moni...

Page 229: ... 5 Using the NUMBER buttons enter the desired three digit value Leading zeros are required Corrections can be made using the DEL button 6 After the value is entered aim the controller at the sensor and press the ENTER button The Ultima Gas Monitor shows the new span gas value for five seconds If the span gas concentration value is higher than the full scale range of that gas the Controller will no...

Page 230: ...s UltimaX Range 4 Press the ENTER button The display prompts Range 5 Using the NUMBER buttons enter the desired value ATM style lagging zeros are required 6 After the value is entered aim the controller at the sensor and press the ENTER button The Ultima X Series Gas Monitor shows the new full scale gas value The SPAN CAL value must be within the range of the instrument Therefore if the combustibl...

Page 231: ...pts UltimaX GasTble 4 Press the ENTER button The display prompts GasTble 5 Using the NUMBER buttons enter the desired value leading zeros are required GAS TABLE SELECTION 001 Methane 002 Propane 003 Ethane 004 Butane 005 Pentane 006 Hexane 007 Cyclopentane 008 Ethylene 6 After the value is entered aim the controller at the sensor and press the ENTER button The Ultima XIR Series Gas Monitor resets ...

Page 232: ...he display prompts SEND 2 Press the ALARM button The display prompts 0 SetPt 1 OnOff 3 To set the alarm values press the 0 button The display prompts Alm Gas Type 4 Press the or button to scroll through the available list NOTE If your gas type or range is not shown on the Controller display use the custom range option on the menu 5 When the selection matching your sensor type is found press the EN...

Page 233: ...ncentration value Repeat this procedure for each alarm level Setting the Three Ultima X Series Gas Monitor Alarm Setpoint Values The Ultima X Series Gas Monitor has three alarm levels The relay option provides three levels of relays and a normally energized trouble relay The three levels of alarm display on the Ultima X Series LCD display even if the relay option is not installed To set the three ...

Page 234: ... alarm level Enabling Disabling and Setting the Mode of the Three Ultima Alarm Setpoints 1 Press the SEND button The display prompts SEND 2 Press the ALARM button The display prompts 0 SetPt 1 OnOff 3 Press the 1 button The display prompts Alm Gas Type 4 Press either the or button to scroll through the list 5 When the selection matching your sensor type is found press the ENTER button The display ...

Page 235: ...esired alarm setpoint 1 2 or 3 then press the ENTER button Invalid entries are ignored The DEL button can be used to delete number entries before the ENTER button is pressed The display prompts AlmSPnt 1 E 0 D 5 To Disable the chosen setpoint aim the Controller at the sensor and press the 0 button The Ultima X Series Gas Monitor will show both the status OFF and the alarm setpoint value 6 To enabl...

Page 236: ... correct time in the military format e g 4 00 P M 16 00 Leading zeros required 3 Press the ENTER button To update the Ultima Gas Monitor internal clock 1 Press the SEND button 2 Aim the Controller at the sensor and press the TIME button NOTE Time and date are updated with this command The Ultima Gas Monitor displays the current time and date for five seconds Procedure 7 Setting the Current Date Th...

Page 237: ...hich is recognized by MSA Model 6000 instruments as a calibration signal 4 to 20 milliamp output signal models are locked to 3 75 mA during this process however oxygen models lock at 21 mA NOTE See Procedure 15 Setting the Alert Option on an Ultima X Series Sensor for details on oxygen sensors calibration signals For the MSA Model 5000 and Toxgard instruments manually place the instrument in the C...

Page 238: ...itself between 1 to 128 day intervals 1 Press the SEND button The display prompts Send 2 Press the CAL button The display prompts Sel Cal Action 3 Press either the or button and scroll to the DaysPerAutoCal display message 4 Press the ENTER button The display prompts CalTerm dy 5 Enter the three digit period desired from 1 day to 128 days Leading zeros are required 6 Aim the controller at the sens...

Page 239: ...play prompts SEND 2 Press the CAL button The display prompts Sel Cal Action 3 Press either the or button and scroll to the NextCal Date display message 4 Press the ENTER button The display prompts MM DD YYYY 5 Enter a valid eight digit date month day year 6 Aim the controller at the sensor and press the ENTER button Leading zeros are required The Ultima Gas Monitor displays the future date auto ca...

Page 240: ...oller at the Ultima Gas Monitor and press the ENTER button The Ultima Gas Monitor displays the last previously successful calibration date Procedure 13 Calibrating Checking the 4 20 mA Ultima X Series Outputs 1 Press the SEND button The display prompts SEND 2 Press the CAL button The display prompts Sel Cal Action 3 Press the or button until the display prompts 4 20 then press the ENTER button The...

Page 241: ...hanges the 20 mA setting Always re adjust the 20 mA output after adjusting the 4 mA output Adjusting the 20 mA output will not change the 4 mA output setting Procedure 14 Resetting the Ultima X Series Monitors 1 Press the SEND button The display prompts SEND 2 Press the SEND button The display prompts 0 RstDt 1 RstSn 3 To reset the datasheets press the 0 button a The display prompts RstData 0 N 1 ...

Page 242: ...n 4 Press the ENTER button The display prompts AlrtOpt 0 N 1 Y 5 Aim the Controller at the Sensor and press either the 0 or 1 button The Ultima X Series Gas Monitor Alert Option is now changed to the selected operation Procedure 16 Setting the Sensor Swap Delay on an Ultima X Sensor The Ultima X Series Gas Monitor is shipped with the Sensor Swap Delay enabled This means that the 4 20 mA output sig...

Page 243: ...s to an Ultima X MODBUS unit without having an error condition for the uninstalled sensors The Ultima X Gas Monitor still polls the uninstalled sensor for automatic sensor recognition should the sensor be installed at a later date An installed sensor cannot be disabled without removing the sensor module from the Ultima X Gas Monitor To change it use the Controller to perform the following steps 1 ...

Page 244: ...the sensor and ENTER button The Ultima X Gas Monitor Sensor is now changed to the selected BAUD and Parity Programming the Controller The Controller can be programmed to set up or group or repeat all of your Ultima Gas Monitors in one particular way There are four possible programs 1 through 4 These programs are useful to eliminate duplicate keystrokes or to ensure the same configuration at each m...

Page 245: ...he ENTER button 4 Enter the keystrokes of the single Ultima Gas Monitor function desired When all of the keystrokes are entered the Controller saves them and displays SAVING for three seconds 5 Repeat steps 1 through 4 using a different program number to program additional Ultima Gas Monitor functions To Use Programs 1 through 4 1 Press the PROGRAM button The display prompts PROGRAM 2 Enter the de...

Page 246: ...CAL OR INITIAL CALIBRATION SET TIME on the Calibrator SET DATE on the Calibrator To resend any command except for those listed above 1 Press the PROGRAM key 2 Press the 0 key This is the number zero key not the key labeled ZERO 3 Aim the Controller at the Ultima Gas Monitor and press ENTER If the last command is one of the three listed above it will not send that command instead the Controller wil...

Page 247: ...ntroller To Determine if Battery Replacement is Necessary 1 Turn the controller unit ON After the unit completes its initialization the display shows ID CODE READY or ready 2 If the display shows the ID CODE message enter the correct code see Using the ID CODE Feature to reach the ready prompt 3 The READY display is the low battery indicator If READY appears upper case letters the batteries are OK...

Page 248: ...not effect the internal real time clock or stored programs therefore the time and date values remain as previously set Determining a Low Battery Condition on the Ultima Calibrator 1 Turn unit ON by pressing any button Low battery results in a double beep for each key press Normal battery results in a single beep for each key press To Install New Batteries in the Ultima Calibrator 1 Turn OFF the Ca...

Page 249: ...er than authorized MSA service personnel could cause the products to fail to perform as designed and persons who rely on these products for their safety could sustain serious personal injury or death Troubleshooting Guidelines PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE POSSIBLE SOLUTION CONTROLLER Dead batteries Replace batteries OR CALIBRATOR IS Dirty lens Clean the dark red lens on the front end INOPERATIVE of the ...

Page 250: ...sor life the monitors are available in either stainless steel or polycarbonate enclosure housings Now with SIL 2 Certified Products HART Field Communications Protocol provides increased sensor data part of cost effective asset management HART also provides convenient setup calibration and diagnostics Calibrate set up or perform diagnostics with HART from any point along the 4 20mA line HART also a...

Page 251: ...L petroleum vapors Combustible gas 0 100 solvents Diborane 0 50 PPM Ethylene oxide 0 10 PPM Fluorine 0 5 PPM Hydrogen fluoride 0 10 PPM Hydrogen 0 1000 PPM Hydrogen chloride 0 50 PPM Hydrogen cyanide 0 50 PPM Hydrogen sulfide 0 10 PPM Hydrogen sulfide 0 50 PPM Hydrogen sulfide 0 100 PPM Hydrogen sulfide 0 500 PPM Nitric oxide 0 100 PPM Nitrogen dioxide 0 10 PPM Oxygen 0 10 compensated Oxygen 0 25 ...

Page 252: ...steel infrared gas detector with display The Ultima XIR Gas Monitor offers DuraSource Technology for improved IR sensor life 316 stainless steel Multiple entry mounting enclosure Fast response time Operation based on dual wavelength heated optics technology providing definitive compensation for temperature humidity and aging effects IR technology for excellent long term stability eliminating the n...

Page 253: ...d sensors Operation of monitor as network slave device Signal boost Each sensor is remotely observable up to 3000 ft from the monitor Universal 85 256 VAC or 8 30 VDC power supply available at remote condulet ModBus RTU output Industry standard format RS 485 half duplex communication interface PLC DCS systems integration PLC DCS ProSoft Tested Connect X3 unit to PLC DCS control systems X3 Technolo...

Page 254: ... air within ductwork using the Ultima XE XA or XIR sensor Quick disconnect fitting enables calibration gas to reach sensors without duct mounted sensor removal Pump Sampling pumps bring remote samples to sensors Sampling modules are available in GP and XP versions of aspirated and pumped modules Calibrator Ultima Monitor Calibrator offers the industry s simplest calibration method a three button d...

Page 255: ...ale or 2ppm non CO toxics RESPONSE TIMES T20 O2 toxics T50 O2 toxics T50 combustible T90 combustible T90 combustible XE XA XE XA XE XA XE XA XIR 12 seconds typically 6 seconds 30 seconds typically 12 seconds 8 seconds 30 seconds 2 seconds HUMIDITY XE XA XIR 15 95 RH non condensing 0 95 RH non condensing SENSOR LIFE Oxygen toxics Combustible Combustible Warranty XE XA XE XA XIR 2 years typical 3 ye...

Page 256: ......

Page 257: ......

Page 258: ......

Page 259: ......

Page 260: ...s made by Mine Safety Appliances Company with respect to the product are voided if the product is not used and serviced in accordance with the instructions in this manual Please protect yourself and others by following them We encourage our cus tomers to write or call regarding this equipment prior to use or for any additional infor mation relative to use or repairs In North America to contact you...

Page 261: ... Operation 1 4 Figure 1 2 Typical Communications Wiring Scheme 1 5 Figure 1 3 Signal Boost Sensor Diagram 1 6 Section 2 Typical Communication Cable Wiring for Signal Boost FIGURE 2 1 2 1 Operation 2 1 Display 2 1 Relays 2 1 Figure 2 1 Typical Communication Cable Wiring for Signal Boost Option 2 2 Figure 2 2 Sensor Display Screens 2 3 Sensor 2 4 Alarm Status Screen 2 4 Table 2 1 Status Indication C...

Page 262: ...us Bits Read Only at address Base 201 3 8 Table 3 10 ModBUS Fault Status Bits Read Only at address Base 202 3 8 Table 3 11 Control Words Read Write 3 9 Table 3 12 ModBUS Command Word 1 Read at address Base 301 Write Coils 1 through 16 3 9 Table 13 13 ModBUS Command Word 2 Read at address Base 302 Write Coils 17 through 32 3 10 Table 3 14 Sensor Type 3 10 Table 3 15 Sensor Engineering Units 3 11 Ta...

Page 263: ...1 1 This is an Addendum to the Ultima Ultima X Instruction Manual P N 10036101 for use with the Ultima X ModBUS X3 Transmitter ...

Page 264: ...ower Maximum power cable length depends on sensor configuration and wire gauge TABLES 1 1 1 2 and 1 3 RS485 Communications Three wire cable 22 AWG is labeled A Transmit Receive B Transmit Receive C Common Typical Communications Wiring Scheme see FIGURE 1 2 Maximum RS 485 communications cable length Trunk 3000 feet Branch 60 feet Use line termination devices to match communication line characterist...

Page 265: ...Figure 1 1 Typical ModBUS Network Topography 1 3 ...

Page 266: ...NFIGURATION MAX POWER MAX POWER CONSUMPTION CONSUMPTION CATALYTIC XIR E CHEM WITH RELAYS CLOSED WITH RELAYS OPEN 0 0 3 2 5 W 1 5W 0 2 1 9 5 W 8 5W 0 1 2 7 0 W 6 0 W 1 0 2 6 0 W 5 0 W 1 1 1 8 5 W 7 5 W 2 0 1 7 5 W 6 5 W 3 0 0 10 0 W 9 0 W Combinations shown represent maximum loads that may be powered from one transmitter without remote power NOTE Only use single catalytic or XIR sensor configuratio...

Page 267: ...Figure 1 2 Typical Communications Wiring Scheme 1 5 ...

Page 268: ...Figure 1 3 Signal Boost Sensor Diagram 1 6 ...

Page 269: ...onditions are acknowledged Alarm and fault conditions are indicated by alarm and the corresponding number of the alarm level s that are activated Relays Gas processing and alarm activation continues even when a display is locked on a screen Are common to all sensors by default Can be assigned specifically to a sensor by enabling only one level of alarm for each sensor This may be accomplished thro...

Page 270: ...Figure 2 1 Typical Communication Cable Wiring for Signal Boost Option 2 2 ...

Page 271: ...Figure 2 2 Sensor Display Screens 2 3 ...

Page 272: ... FIGURE 2 3 In the North American version of the Ultima X with X3 Technology a screen will appear when a combustible sensor crosses 50 60 or 90 of the full scale range This screen will override all sensor data or fault screens and will clear when all sensors are below 50 of scale can be acknowledged by the operator the instrument will go back to normal display operation until the sensor or any oth...

Page 273: ...ough each sensor position This allows the use of the IR signal to be received for each sensor position user to see what alarms are active for each sensor when the status screen is displayed NOTE In the CSA mode the display alarm fault locking feature will be removed This will allow the display to continuously cycle through the three sensors In doing so the alarm flags will be displayed as the inst...

Page 274: ...zero or span command Sensor calibration depends on the sensor number showing on the display when the command is received Push button Depends on the sensor number showing on the display when the command is received Press and release push button to acknowledge any conditions With the desired sensor data sensor or gas level on the display press the push button to activate a calibration Calibration fu...

Page 275: ...t for the gas level returns the actual value The other sensors on that specific transmitter are not active A gas level of 99 9 will be returned to indicate that ModBUS Communications Baud rate and data format defaults per data table specification are adjustable by using a Hand held Controller or ModBUS command Each transmitter Is a slave on the communications network Must have a unique address and...

Page 276: ...ddresses Press the ADDRESS button again to save the new address A ModBUS controller by writing to the corresponding register in the data table ModBUS Communications The communications protocol is ModBUS RTU over an RS 485 hardware network The default settings for communications parameters are 19200 baud and even parity The stop bits are fixed at 1 stop bit For data types that are larger than one w...

Page 277: ...ter is located at address 1000 and has a default value of 40 000 This may be changed by writing a new value within the permissible range to that address Subsequent addresses must take this new base address into consideration The base address may be changed by writing to address 1000 regardless of its contents Table 3 3 ModBUS Bas Address Read Write DESCRIPTION ADDRESS POSSIBLE VALUES ModBUS Data T...

Page 278: ...s Option Installed Base 3 0 Relays not installed 1 Relays installed Reserved for future use Base 4 Date of Mfg Year Sensor 1 Base 5 20XX Date of Mfg Month Sensor 1 Base 6 1 12 Date of Mfg Day Sensor 1 Base 7 1 31 Date of Mfg Year Sensor 2 Base 8 20XX Date of Mfg Month Sensor 2 Base 9 1 12 Date of Mfg Day Sensor 2 Base 10 1 31 Date of Mfg Year Sensor 3 Base 11 20XX Date of Mfg Month Sensor 3 Base 1...

Page 279: ...etpoint Sensor 3 Base 123 Single Precision Float Alarm 2 Setpoint Sensor 1 Base 125 Single Precision Float Alarm 2 Setpoint Sensor 2 Base 127 Single Precision Float Alarm 2 Setpoint Sensor 3 Base 129 Single Precision Float Alarm 3 Setpoint Sensor 1 Base 131 Single Precision Float Alarm 3 Setpoint Sensor 2 Base 133 Single Precision Float Alarm 3 Setpoint Sensor 3 Base 135 Single Precision Float Ala...

Page 280: ...able 3 7 Alarm Function Codes Word 2 Read Write at Address Base 138 NAME BITS FUNCTION DESCRIPTION Alarm 3 Direction Sensor 1 0 1 Increasing 0 Decreasing Alarm 3 Direction Sensor 2 1 1 Increasing 0 Decreasing Alarm 3 Direction Sensor 3 2 1 Increasing 0 Decreasing Alarm 1 Latch Status Sensor 1 3 0 Non Latching 1 Latching Alarm 1 Latch Status Sensor 2 4 0 Non Latching 1 Latching Alarm 1 Latch Status...

Page 281: ... SPAN 3 Waiting for SPAN 4 Calibration Aborted 5 Zero Cal Fault 6 Span Cal Fault 7 Calibration Completed Successfully Temperature Sensor 1 Base 217 Signed Integer Temperature Sensor 2 Base 218 Signed Integer Temperature Sensor 3 Base 219 Signed Integer Min Gas Reading over average Interval Sensor 1 Base 220 Single Precision Float Min Gas Reading over average Interval Sensor 2 Base 222 Single Preci...

Page 282: ...rift counter Sensor 3 Base 249 0 20 Internal Error Code Ultima X Base 250 For future implementation Internal Error Code Sensor 1 Base 251 For future implementation Internal Error Code Sensor 2 Base 252 For future implementation Internal Error Code Sensor 3 Base 253 For future implementation Information Flags 1 Base 254 See TABLE 3 16 Information Flags 2 Base 255 See TABLE 3 17 Information Flags 3 ...

Page 283: ...ON DESCRIPTION Fault Relay Active 0 Set when any fault is detected Sensor Missing Sensor 1 1 Set when this fault is detected Sensor Missing Sensor 2 2 Set when this fault is detected Sensor Missing Sensor 3 3 Set when this fault is detected Calibration Fault Sensor 1 4 Set when this fault is detected Calibration Fault Sensor 2 5 Set when this fault is detected Calibration Fault Sensor 3 6 Set when...

Page 284: ...ration in progress Start Standard Full Calibration Sensor 2 4 5 Rtn s fault if any Calibration in progress Start Standard Full Calibration Sensor 3 5 6 Rtn s fault if any Calibration in progress Start Standard Zero Calibration Sensor 1 6 7 Rtn s fault if any Calibration in progress Start Standard Zero Calibration Sensor 2 7 8 Rtn s fault if any Calibration in progress Start Standard Zero Calibrati...

Page 285: ...able Sensor 2 10 27 1 to Disable Disable Sensor 3 11 28 1 to Disable Reserved for future use 12 29 Reserved for future use 13 30 Reserved for future use 14 31 Not used 15 32 Table 3 14 Sensor Type SENSOR TYPE VALUE SENSOR TYPE 13 COMB 1S 100 LEL 1 LEL 25 LEL 0 6 Propane 257 CO 100 PPM 1 PPM MSA 25E F 60 PPM 258 CO 500 PPM 1 PPM MSA 25E F 300 PPM 259 SO2 25 PPM 1 PPM CTL 7ST F 10 PPM 260 H2S 10 0 P...

Page 286: ...GERMANE 3 0 PPM 0 1 PPM CTL 7SH 2 5 PPM 283 DIBORANE 50 PPM 1 PPM CTL 7SH 15 PPM 284 FLUORINE 5 0 PPM 0 1 PPM MSA 7CLH 4 0 PPM 285 HF 286 BROMINE 5 0 PPM 0 1 PPM MSA 7CLH 2 5 PPM 287 ETO 10 0 PPM 0 1 PPM 5 PPM 288 O2 10 0 0 1 MSA 10019727 5 0 2 IRIS 19 COMB 1S 100 LEL 10 LEL 31 LEL 20 COMB 1S 100 LEL 1 LEL 49 LEL 21 COMB 1S 100 LEL 1 LEL 68 LEL 22 Tankerguard 290 CLO2 0 02 resolution 289 NH4 1000 ...

Page 287: ...Condition Sensor 2 13 0 Zero 1 Span Cal Fault Condition Sensor 3 14 0 Zero 1 Span Not Used 15 Table 3 17 Information Flags Word 2 Read at address Base 255 NAME BITS FUNCTION DESCRIPTION Configuration Reset 0 Set if TRUE Fault RAM Main 1 Set if TRUE FAULT FLASH MAIN 2 Set if TRUE EEPROM WRITE ERROR 3 Set if TRUE MUX FAULT 4 Set if TRUE FAULT INCOMPATIBLE SENSOR 1 5 Set if TRUE FAULT INCOMPATIBLE SE...

Page 288: ...Set if TRUE Sensor Configuration Reset 1 12 Set if TRUE Sensor Configuration Reset 2 13 Set if TRUE Sensor Configuration Reset 3 14 Set if TRUE Not Used 15 Table 3 19 Information Flags Word 4 Read at address Base 257 NAME BITS FUNCTION DESCRIPTION Underrange Average Interval S1 0 Set if TRUE Underrange Average Interval S2 1 Set if TRUE Underrange Average Interval S3 2 Set if TRUE Overrange Average...

Page 289: ...Table 3 20 Alternate Gas Readings Read Write at address Base 258 to Base 260 DESCRIPTION VALUE Normal Gas Detection 400 2000 Fault 230 Overrange 2110 Suppressed 305 Disabled 0 3 14 ...

Page 290: ......

Page 291: ...Installation Operation Manual December 2013 Rev 2 03 215 7710 5th St S E Calgary Alberta Canada T2H 2L9 Phone 403 255 9544 Fax 403 259 2343 www barnett engg com e mail sales barnett engg com ...

Page 292: ......

Page 293: ...ging Telephone Directories 14 Error Messages 14 6 PROGRAM SUMMARY 15 7 PROGRAM CODES 16 How to Enter the Programming Mode 16 Voices 16 Directories 17 DTMF Codes 20 Timer Configuration 21 I O Configuration 22 System Settings 25 Expanders 26 Reset Database 27 8 PROGRAMMING REFERENCE 29 9 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES 31 10 TROUBLESHOOTING 44 11 SPECIFICATIONS 47 12 APPENDIX A PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES 48 13 APPE...

Page 294: ...ns 4 Figure 2 Programming Cable Wiring 4 Figure 3 ProTalk Plus Wiring Diagram 5 Figure 4 Alarm Input Connection 6 Figure 5 ProTalk Plus Front Panel 11 Figure 6 Activating an Annunciator Panel 41 Figure 7 Concentrating Remote Alarms 42 Figure 8 Option 004 Connections 50 Figure 9 Mounting Detail 54 ...

Page 295: ...ng with the voice messages to activate such devices as radio pagers relays or annunciator panels It can be used as a master station to concentrate alarms from a number of remote sites It can be commanded to perform remote control functions by receiving codes from a tone telephone Expanders can be added to increase the capacity of the unit from the basic 8 alarm inputs and 4 relay outputs up to 64 ...

Page 296: ... installation basic programming and operation If you wish to change some of the default settings or have the B1290 perform more advanced functions continue on to the next chapter where the Program Codes are described in detail Several step by step examples of programming the B1290 into different configurations are provided The final chapter describes some of the problems most commonly experienced ...

Page 297: ...ut 3 Alarm 3 Input 4 COS Input 4 Alarm 4 Input 5 Ground 5 Alarm 5 Input 6 ACK Input 6 Alarm 6 Input 7 Ground 7 Alarm 7 Input 8 11 5 to 28 power Version 1 8 Alarm 8 Input 10 to 30V power Version 2 9 Ground 10 Ground RELAYS 1 Relay 1 NC POWER 2 Relay 1 Common 2 1mm power centre ground 3 Relay 1 NO 4 Relay 2 NC PHONE 5 Relay 2 Common RJ11 Line 1 6 Relay 2 NO 7 Relay 3 NC PGM 8 Relay 3 Common RJ11 Lin...

Page 298: ...D 3 21 1 3 21 1 352 5 0 6 5217 6 9 56 21 506 5 6 92 80 6 5 86 6 5 56 32 5 5217 6 9 56 21 5 2 3 1 5 32 5 5 2 3 1 5 Figure 1 Connector Locations 3 3UR7DON 3OXV 9HUVLRQ 3UR7DON 3OXV 9HUVLRQ 3 Figure 2 Programming Cable Wiring ...

Page 299: ...the telephone line should not be connected until the rest of the installation is complete Use a flat blade screwdriver to make connections to the screw terminals on the sides of the enclosure Alarms In its default condition the B1290 looks for a normally open NO contact which closes to ground to indicate an alarm The B1290 may also be programmed to accept inputs normally closed NC to ground which ...

Page 300: ...dicate the channel is clear and a low signal when the channel is busy The B1290 may also be programmed to recognize the reverse polarity To change this parameter refer to the squelch polarity in System Settings Program Code 6 This input is internally pulled up to work with open collector radio outputs In its default program condition the input is pulled high when clear and driven low when busy Loc...

Page 301: ...up it will prompt you to input three parameters which must be entered before it can operate the voice messages a list of telephone numbers and the Acknowledge Code Once these values have been entered with its default settings the unit will function as a telephone dialer when an alarm is present If you require the B1290 to perform more advanced functions continue on to the chapter where the Program...

Page 302: ...ce message programmed B1290 Program Voice B1290 Site is The B1290 is prompting you to enter the name of the site The name you program will be announced at the start of every message along with the list of alarms To record the voice message enter the record code YOU After you hit the second star the B1290 will prompt you with a beep beep tone B1290 beep beep As soon as you hear the tone you can beg...

Page 303: ...nly the basic auto dialer configuration Enter the phone number using the pushbuttons on your telephone The entry shown below will result in the B1290 dialing the selected number and then speaking the alarm messages The at the beginning is the DIAL command followed by a command for VOICE YOU B1290 Directory A Line One is DIAL 4032559544 VOICE If there is an error in the entry hit the program code f...

Page 304: ... the chapter where Program Codes are explained in detail Otherwise hang up the programming phone At this point the B1290 will function as an alarm reporting unit over the telephone dialing through the numbers you have programmed into Directory A until it is answered then announcing the voice messages you have recorded to report an alarm These parameters will be stored indefinitely and you will not...

Page 305: ...shes when vocabulary messages are being played or when there is an error in the user voices Tone The Tone LED is on for the duration of a transmitted DTMF digit or other generated tone It will also be on when call progress tones are detected on the phone line It will flash once for each received or transmitted DTMF digit Hook The Hook LED comes on whenever the B1290 goes off hook to dial or answer...

Page 306: ... line the Ring LED illuminates Since answering the telephone is a low priority task to the B1290 it may ignore the ringing if it is processing other tasks e g speaking on the radio PTT The PTT LED will light when the B1290 generates a push to talk signal to the radio ...

Page 307: ...g an Alarm When the B1290 calls you on the telephone it may take up to five seconds before it starts speaking After it announces the alarms it prompts you to Enter Acknowledge Code You have five seconds to begin entering the digits If the B1290 has been programmed to operate its relays Program Code 3 DTMF Codes you may send a relay code over the telephone before acknowledging the alarms The B1290 ...

Page 308: ...possible B1290 Enter Control Code YOU B1290 Telephone Format is Directory B YOU B1290 Telephone Format is Directory C It is also common to enter this code using a DTMF keypad over the radio system when the operators at the site change shift The B1290 will not allow an empty directory to be selected Error Messages The B1290 will speak error messages when it is called on the phone line interrogated ...

Page 309: ... in the main programming menu are given as a summary below Voices page 16 Directories page 17 DTMF Codes page 20 Timer Configuration page 21 I O Configuration page 22 System Settings page 25 Expanders page 26 Reset Database page 27 Audio Levels page 27 ...

Page 310: ...seconds and the B1290 will automatically prompt you with Program Access Enter Program Code IMPORTANT Remember that all programming codes must be followed by the code to enter them The following chapter Programming Reference divides the programming parameters into functional blocks Refer to that chapter to determine the parameter changes required for a specific function Appendix C is a Programming ...

Page 311: ...s in the B1290 To allow different alarms to perform different actions when they are active each alarm can be selected to use any one of the directories Each directory defines a unique sequence of actions There is also a Directory Control Code that modifies the directory selection that the alarms are programmed for When this code is used there are restrictions placed on how the alarms are assigned ...

Page 312: ...its representing the required actions Commands that can be used in the directory and the digits used to select them are Dial digits Radio Wait 1 3 digits seconds Alert Two Tone Paging 4 or 5 digits 4 or 5 digits frequencies in 1 Hz ie 12345 would be 1234 5 Hz Five Tone Paging 5 digits 5 digit cap code or Five Tone Paging 1digit 5 digits preamble cap code Single tone 4 or 5 digits frequency in 1 Hz...

Page 313: ...s empty or B1290 Directory A Line One is DIAL 4032559544 DTMF 1234 VOICE Contents of the next line You can either accept this entry or edit the line Insert A New Line Inserting a line will automatically alter the line numbers of any subsequent commands If there are previously programmed commands in the subsequent lines to the line inserted the numerical value of the lines will shift down in sequen...

Page 314: ...odes Alarm On Off Codes Remote Alarm Input Codes Interrogate Code Directory Control Code Exit to Enter Program Code prompt Acknowledge Code The Acknowledge Code is sent by the called party to indicate that the alarm message has been received This stops the calling sequence of the B1290 B1290 Acknowledge Code is YOU x 1 to 8 DTMF digits Default 1234 Access Code The Access Code is used as a password...

Page 315: ...arm LED will show the status for remote alarms Do not connect an alarm signal line to an input that has been programmed with a remote alarm input code B1290 Alarm One Remote Alarm Code is YOU x 1 to 8 DTMF digits clear Default empty Interrogate Code The Interrogate Code is used to find the current status of the B1290 When it receives the code the unit reports its site ID any alarms which are prese...

Page 316: ...de 2 Phone Directory Interval Timer A If an alarm is not acknowledged after one pass through the directory this timer determines how often the B1290 will repeat the reporting sequence B1290 Timer A is 2 minutes YOU minutes x 1 to 249 Default 2 minutes Interval Timer B After the Timer A cycle has completed this timer determines how often the B1290 goes through its alarm reporting sequence B1290 Tim...

Page 317: ...1290 Alarm Format is YOU Normally Open Normally Closed Normally Open Latched Normally Closed Latched Next Default 0 normally open Alarm Timer Debounce Timescale The debounce timers on the alarm inputs can operate with a resolution of 1 seconds or 1 minutes When the B1290 speaks seconds for this value it is indicating that the timer is counting in 1 second steps and when it speaks minutes it is cou...

Page 318: ...Seconds Minutes Next Default 0 seconds Relay On Time The B1290 has four relays that are turned On with the relay On codes and turned Off with the relay Off codes The relay timer may be used to turn On a relay for a specified duration and then turn it Off automatically The timer controls the period of time the relay is On The interval is programmable from 1 to 199 seconds or from 1 to 199 minutes d...

Page 319: ...ch Polarity This setting changes the polarity of the signal used to indicate a busy radio channel B1290 Squelch is YOU Busy when the input is low Busy when the input is high Exit Next Default 0 transmit on high Relay Voices This setting enables or disables the B1290 s spoken response to a relay operation If the B1290 is used in a control situation where monitoring the relay operation is not requir...

Page 320: ...s of the signals encountered on the phone line Do not use the Answer command immediately following a Dial command in the directories when Call Progress is enabled This is the equivalent of two Answer commands and may result in unreliable operation B1290 Dial Tone is YOU Call Progress is not used Call Progress is used Exit Next Default 1 enabled Expanders When Program Code 7 is entered the B1290 gi...

Page 321: ...to the level of the signal that is coming from the attached equipment Receive levels can be in the range between 20 dBm and 0 dBm For transmit levels the setting determines the amplitude of the signal that will be produced at the output of the B1290 Transmit levels can be set in the range between 20 dBm and 0 dBm Only even numbers are valid If an odd number is entered it will be rounded down The n...

Page 322: ...PAGE 28 PROGRAM CODES Default B1290 Telephone Code Five is Telephone Receive Level YOU Level setting x 20 to 0 Exit Next Default ...

Page 323: ...am Code 2 2 Alarm Operation This section identifies all of the parameters that determine WHEN an alarm will be announced By programming these parameters you control when an alarm is recognized and announced by the ProTalk Plus Alarm Format Program Code 5 1 Alarm Delay Timebase Program Code 5 1 Alarm Debounce Program Code 5 1 Interval Timer A Program Code 4 Interval Timer B Program Code 4 Cycles Th...

Page 324: ...ameters These parameters control the operation of the unit when it is connected to a two way radio Refer to the installation section in Getting Started for the required connections to the radio Directory Radio Command Program Code 2 Squelch Polarity Program Code 6 Radio Warmup Program Code 2 7 Expander Attachment When an expander is added to the system these parameters must be set They configure t...

Page 325: ... at ten minute intervals the B1290 should switch to trying once an hour The COS on the radio used with the B1290 gives a high signal when the channel is busy B1290 Enter Program Code YOU Directory Code B1290 Enter Directory YOU Directory A B1290 Directory A Line One is YOU Change B1290 beep YOU RADIO VOICE B1290 Directory A Line One is RADIO VOICE YOU Next B1290 Directory A Line Two is YOU Change ...

Page 326: ...tory A Line Seven is DIAL 4032559544 VOICE YOU Next B1290 Directory A Line Eight is YOU Quit B1290 Enter Directory YOU Quit B1290 Enter Program Code YOU Configuration B1290 Answer Rings is 4 YOU Next B1290 Timer A is 2 minutes YOU Enter 10 minutes B1290 Timer A is 10 minutes YOU Next B1290 Timer B is 10 minutes YOU Enter 60 minutes B1290 Timer B is 60 minutes YOU Next B1290 Times A is 3 YOU Enter ...

Page 327: ...pause for 2 minutes Alert tone Ajax Compressor Station Power Failure Ajax Compressor Station Power Failure Enter Acknowledge Code pause for 2 minutes Over telephone Dial 4032559544 Ajax Compressor Station Power Failure Enter Acknowledge Code pause for 5 seconds waiting for acknowledge code Ajax Compressor Station Power Failure Enter Acknowledge Code pause for 5 seconds waiting for acknowledge code...

Page 328: ... is YOU Change B1290 beep YOU DIAL 4032559544 VOICE B1290 Directory A Line One is DIAL 4032559544 VOICE YOU Next B1290 Directory A Line Two is YOU Change B1290 beep YOU DIAL 4032559598 VOICE B1290 Directory A Line Two is DIAL 4032559598 VOICE YOU Next B1290 Directory A Line Three is YOU Quit B1290 Enter Directory YOU Select Directory B B1290 Directory B Line One is YOU Change B1290 beep YOU DIAL 4...

Page 329: ...A YOU Next Repeat this for all of the alarms When you wish to dial from the B directory call up the B1290 and follow these steps B1290 Enter Control Code YOU Directory Control Code B1290 Telephone Format is Directory B And to change it back B1290 Enter Control Code YOU Directory Control Code B1290 Telephone Format is Directory A Example 3 Different Alarms Dialing Different Telephone Numbers A B129...

Page 330: ...wo is Directory A YOU Next B1290 Alarm Three is Directory A YOU Select Directory B B1290 Alarm Three is Directory B B1290 Alarm Four is Directory A YOU Select Directory B B1290 Alarm Four is Directory B YOU Quit The B1290 is now programmed to dial Directory A when alarms 1 or 2 occur and Directory B when alarms 3 or 4 occur Example 4 Actuating Relays In this example when you receive the alarm High...

Page 331: ...y And so on until all of the Relay Codes are done B1290 Enter DTMF Code YOU Next B1290 Enter Program Code YOU I O Configuration B1290 Enter Configuration Code YOU Next B1290 Relay Timer is seconds YOU Select minutes for the timebase B1290 Relay Timer is minutes YOU Next B1290 Relay One On Timer is 00 minutes YOU Select 10 minutes for the time B1290 Relay One On is 10 minutes YOU Next B1290 Relay T...

Page 332: ...2TONE 855 5 1433 4 VOICE B1290 Directory A Line One is RADIO 2 TONE 855 5 Hz 1433 4 Hz VOICE YOU Next B1290 Directory A Line Two is YOU Change B1290 beep YOU B1290 Directory A Line Two is DIAL 4032559544 VOICE YOU Next B1290 Directory A Line Three You are finished programming and may hang up the phone Example 6 Dialing a Paging Terminal In this example rather than using a private radio system the ...

Page 333: ...ng 734 as part of the alarm ON DTMF code The 734 is included as part of the telephone number and is sent with every alarm It appears much like a site identifier This example also assumes that the pager could be dialed directly Sometimes a separate number for the pager must be dialed after the number for the paging terminal In that case you might need to insert another delay and there might not be ...

Page 334: ...290 Times A is 3 YOU Change the times A to 2 B1290 Times A is 2 YOU Next The timers are now set now put the commands into the directory B1290 Enter Program Code YOU Directory Code B1290 Enter Directory YOU Directory A B1290 Directory A Line One is YOU Change B1290 beep YOU RADIO ALERT VOICE VOICE B1290 Directory A Line One is RADIO ALERT VOICE VOICE YOU Next B1290 Directory A Line Two is YOU Quit ...

Page 335: ...ote alarm occurs the DTMF code for that alarm is transmitted to the central site On receiving this code the central site activates the relay associated with that alarm When the alarm clears the Off code is transmitted from the remote and the central site s associated relay is released 3UR7DON 3OXV 3UR7DON 3OXV 3UR7DON 3OXV Figure 6 Activating an Annunciator Panel Example 9 Concentrating Alarms fro...

Page 336: ...90 to increase the number of alarm inputs and relay outputs Install and program the main B1290 unit as per the instructions in this manual Install the expander within 100 of the B1290 Complete the wiring to all the alarms and relays Connect the cable supplied with the expander from the auxiliary connector on the B1290 to the EXP connector on the expander Apply power to the installation The expande...

Page 337: ...ng is a list of those which may be programmed Voices Relay On Off codes Alarm On Off codes Remote alarm input codes Alarm format Relay On time Alarm delay debounce Expander Site ID enable If you try to change the parameters in other expanders the B1290 will announce Error To solve this problem define all of the expanders in the system in the B1290 using program code 7 number of expanders To change...

Page 338: ... for a local programming phone the telephone line should be plugged into the PHONE jack Check that the telephone is dialing from the correct directory Program Code 2 The B1290 has four separate directories A B C and D Check that the telephone numbers are entered correctly in the selected directory and that the directory is not empty Check that an alarm is actually present as indicated by the LEDs ...

Page 339: ... The acknowledge code can be changed using Program Code 3 If the B1290 is not acknowledging over radio it may be necessary to adjust the receive level setting for the radio port If the B1290 is not acknowledging over the telephone line it may be necessary to adjust the receive level setting for the phone port Check that the TONE LED on the front panel of the B1290 lights when a DTMF digit is recei...

Page 340: ...ks and on rare occasions it may find that a memory location has been corrupted If that happens the B1290 resets all programmed parameters except the voice messages to the default values At the same time it will announce Program Code Error over the radio As the telephone directories have been lost the B1290 cannot dial out to report the failure over the phone The only way you will be able to tell t...

Page 341: ...ne Receive Audio 20 dBm to 0 dBm 10 k ohm impedance unbalanced AC coupled Transmit Audio 20 dBm to 0 dBm 600 ohm impedance unbalanced AC coupled Channel Busy COS Ground closure PTT Open collector 25 V max 150 mA max Acknowledge Input Ground closure Voice Quality Digitized toll quality 32 kbps Power Version 1 11 5 VDC to 28 VDC 100 mA standby current 10 mA per active relay Version 2 10V DC to 30V D...

Page 342: ...ectory C alternates with Directory D Directory Commands Each directory can have up to 20 lines of command sequences The commands are executed when an alarm using the directory is active The commands are Dial phone the programmed number Voice Speak the alarm messages Radio turn on the radio transmitter Wait Insert a pause 1 to 249 seconds 2 Tone send a two tone page 5 Tone send a five tone page 1 T...

Page 343: ...Pulse Dial Forces dialing to be pulse instead of tone Number of Expanders Sets the number of connected expanders Disable Expander ID Stops the site ID in the expander from being spoken Audio Levels Sets the gain for audio signals in the B1290 ...

Page 344: ...er module Adds 8 inputs and 4 relays Maximum of 7 expanders Option 004 External power pack with 120 VAC power supply sealed battery and charger 12 hour capacity in standby Connection of the Option 004 power supply is shown in Figure 8 3UR7DON 3OXV Figure 8 Option 004 Connections ...

Page 345: ...ID Alarms Record Next Quit Relays Record Next Quit Erase Erase Directory Dir A Change Line DIAL RADIO WAIT ALERT 2 TONE 5 TONE 1 TONE DTMF VOICE ANSWER Erase Line Insert Line Next Quit Dir B Same as Directory A Dir C Same as Directory A Dir D Same as Directory A Directory help DTMF Codes Acknowledge Change Clear Next Access Change Clear Next Relay On Off Change Clear Next Alarm On Off Change ...

Page 346: ...ry Control Change Clear Next Configuration Rings Before Answer Change Auto Ack Next Timer A Change Next Timer B Change Next Times A Change Next I O Config Alarm Format NO NC NO latched NC latched Next Alarm Timebase Seconds Minutes Next Alarm Debounce Change Next Using Directory Disabled Dir A Dir B Dir C Dir D Next ...

Page 347: ...elch Polarity Busy low Busy high Next Relay Voices Off On Next Ack Request Off On Next Dial Tone Call Progress Off On Next Expanders Number of Expanders Change Next Site Voice Enable Off On Next Reset Database Reset Next Audio Levels Radio TX Tone Change Next Radio TX DTMF Change Next Radio TX Voice Change Next Radio RX Change Next Phone RX Change Next ...

Page 348: ...PAGE 54 APPENDIX D MOUNTING 15 APPENDIX D MOUNTING Figure 9 Mounting Detail ...

Page 349: ...use harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Warning This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions manual may cause interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential is likely to cause ...

Page 350: ... equipment or refund the purchase price at Barnett Engineering Ltd s option after return of such equipment by buyer to Barnett Engineering Ltd Shipment to Barnett Engineering Ltd s facility shall be borne on account of buyer 1 Consequential Damages Barnett Engineering Ltd shall not be liable for any incidental or consequential damages incurred as a result of any defect in any equipment sold hereun...

Page 351: ......

Page 352: ...Powerware Series Eaton 9130 UPS 700 3000 VA User s Guide ...

Page 353: ...ent Regulations ICES 003 Cet appareil numérique de la classe A respecte toutes les exigences du Reglement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada EN 62040 2 Some configurations are classified under EN 62040 2 as Class A UPS for Unrestricted Sales Distribution For these configurations the following applies WARNING This is a Class A UPS Product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio int...

Page 354: ...articular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures S Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna S Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver S Connect the equipment i...

Page 355: ... Phone 358 9 452 661 Fax 358 9 452 665 68 Special Symbols The following are examples of symbols used on the UPS or accessories to alert you to important information RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK Observe the warning associated with the risk of electric shock symbol CAUTION REFER TO OPERATOR S MANUAL Refer to your operator s manual for additional information such as important operating and maintenance inst...

Page 356: ...ount Setup 20 Rackmount Wiring Installation 23 Installing the UPS 23 Connecting the EBM s 26 Tower Installation 29 Tower Wiring Installation 30 Installing the UPS 30 Connecting the EBM s 32 UPS Initial Startup 34 4 Operation 37 Control Panel Functions 37 Changing the Language 38 Display Functions 38 User Settings 40 Operating Modes 43 Normal Mode 43 Battery Mode 43 Bypass Mode 44 Standby Mode 45 U...

Page 357: ... 54 Connectivity Cards 56 Remote Emergency Power off 56 Relay Output Contacts 58 Programmable Signal Inputs 59 Modem Operation 60 LanSafe Power Management Software 60 6 UPS Maintenance 61 UPS and Battery Care 61 Storing the UPS and Batteries 62 When to Replace Batteries 62 Replacing Batteries 62 Replacing Rackmount UPS Internal Batteries 63 Replacing Tower UPS Internal Batteries 66 Replacing Rackm...

Page 358: ... OF CONTENTS Eaton 9130 UPS 700 3000 VA User s Guide S 164201718 Rev 3 www eaton com powerquality iii 9 Warranty 107 Two Year Limited Warranty USA and Canada 107 Load Protection Guarantee USA and Canada 109 ...

Page 359: ...TABLE OF CONTENTS Eaton 9130 UPS 700 3000 VA User s Guide S 164201718 Rev 3 www eaton com powerquality iv ...

Page 360: ...rformance and reliability the Eaton 9130 s unique benefits include S True online double conversion technology with high power density utility frequency independence and generator compatibility S ABM technology that uses advanced battery management to increase battery service life optimize recharge time and provide a warning before the end of useful battery life S Selectable High Efficiency mode of...

Page 361: ...ity 2 Figure 1 shows the Eaton 9130 rackmount UPS and Figure 2 shows the optional rackmount EBM Figure 1 The Eaton 9130 Rackmount UPS Figure 2 The Eaton 9130 Rackmount EBM Figure 3 shows the Eaton 9130 tower UPS and optional EBM Figure 3 The Eaton 9130 Tower UPS and EBM 2000 3000 VA Models Shown ...

Page 362: ...nants Ambient temperature must not exceed 40 C 104 F Do not operate near water or excessive humidity 90 maximum S To reduce the risk of fire connect only to a circuit provided with branch circuit overcurrent protection in accordance with the National Electrical Code NEC ANSI NFPA 70 S Output overcurrent protection and disconnect switch must be provided by others S To comply with international stan...

Page 363: ...SFARLIG HØJSPÆNDING Alle reparationer og vedligeholdelse bør kun udføres af en AUTORISERET SERVICETEKNIKER Ingen af UPS ens indvendige dele kan repareres af brugeren ADVARSEL S Denne UPS indeholder sin egen energikilde batterier Udgangsstikket på UPS en kan endog være strømførende når UPS en ikke er koblet til en vekselstrømsforsyning S Installér denne UPS i et temperatur og fugtighedskontrolleret...

Page 364: ...s voordat u de apparatuur in bedrijf neemt en bewaar deze handleiding als naslagwerk GEVAAR Deze UPS bevat LEVENSGEVAARLIJKE ELEKTRISCHE SPANNING Alle reparaties en onderhoud dienen UITSLUITEND DOOR ERKEND SERVICEPERSONEEL te worden uitgevoerd Er bevinden zich GEEN ONDERDELEN in de UPS die DOOR DE GEBRUIKER kunnen worden GEREPAREERD WAARSCHUWING S Deze UPS bevat een eigen energiebron accu s De UPS...

Page 365: ...pgeruimd Raadpleeg hiervoor uw plaatselijke voorschriften S Nooit batterijen in het vuur gooien De batterijen kunnen ontploffen Tarkeita Turvaohjeita TÄRKEITÄ TURVAOHJEITA SUOMI SÄILYTÄ NÄMÄ OHJEET Tämä käyttöohje sisältää tärkeitä ohjeita joita on noudatettava UPS virtalähteen ja akkujen asennuksen ja huollon yhteydessä Lue kaikki ohjeet ennen laitteiston käyttöä ja säilytä ohje myöhempää tarvett...

Page 366: ...DE SÉCURITÉ IMPORTANTES CONSERVER CES INSTRUCTIONS Ce manuel comporte des instructions importantes que vous êtes invité à suivre lors de toute procédure d installation et de maintenance des batteries et de l onduleur Veuillez consulter entièrement ces instructions avant de faire fonctionner l équipement et conserver ce manuel afin de pouvoir vous y reporter ultérieurement DANGER Cet onduleur conti...

Page 367: ...écautions appropriées L entretien doit être réalisé par du personnel qualifié connaissant bien les batteries et les précautions nécessaires N autorisez aucun personnel non qualifié à manipuler les batteries S Une mise au rebut réglementaire des batteries est obligatoire Consulter les règlements en vigueur dans votre localité S Ne jamais jeter les batteries au feu L exposition aux flammes risque de...

Page 368: ... geliefert werden S Um internationale Normen und Verdrahtungsvorschriften zu erfüllen dürfen die an den Ausgang dieser USV angeschlossenen Geräte zusammen einen Erdableitstrom von insgesamt 3 5 Milliampere nicht überschreiten VORSICHT S Batterien können das Risiko eines elektrischen Schlags bergen oder durch hohen Kurzschlussstrom in Brand geraten Die richtigen Vorsichtsmaßnahmen beachten Die Wart...

Page 369: ...incendio effettuare il collegamento soltanto a un circuito dotato di una protezione da sovraccarico per il circuito derivato di max 100 ampere come stabilito dalle norme statunitensi sugli impianti elettrici NEC ANSI NFPA 70 S La protezione da sovraccarico per le uscite e l interruttore di scollegamento devono essere forniti da altri produttori S Per conformità con gli standard internazionali e co...

Page 370: ... som er fritt for ledende forurensende stoffer Romtemperaturen må ikke overskride 40 C Den må ikke brukes i nærheten av vann eller ved meget høy luftfuktighet 90 maks S For å redusere brannfaren skal det bare kobles til et kretsløp med 100 A maksimum linjeforgrenings overbelastningsbeskyttelse i henhold til NEC ANSI NFPA 70 S Overbelastningsbeskyttelse for strømutgang og bryterkontakt skal leveres...

Page 371: ...aminadores condutíveis A temperatura ambiente não deve exceder 40 C Não opere próximo a água ou em umidade excessiva máx 90 S Para reduzir o risco de incêndio conecte somente ao circuito fornecido com a proteção máxima de 100 ampères contra a sobretensão do circuito derivado de acordo com a norma ANSI NFPA 70 do NEC S A proteção contra a sobretensão de saída e o disjuntor deve ser fornecida por te...

Page 372: ...í íå ïîäêëþ åí ê ñåòè ïåðåìåííîãî òîêà S Äëÿ ñíèæåíèÿ îïàñíîñòè ïîæàðà èëè ïîðàæåíèÿ ýëåêòðè åñêèì òîêîì óñòàíàâëèâàéòå ÈÁÏ â çàêðûòîì ïîìåùåíèè ñ êîíòðîëèðóåìûìè òåìïåðàòóðîé è âëàæíîñòüþ â êîòîðîì îòñóòñòâóþò ïðîâîäÿùèå çàãðÿçíÿþùèå âåùåñòâà Òåìïåðàòóðà îêðóæàþùåãî âîçäóõà íå äîëæíà ïðåâûøàòü 40 Ñ Íå ýêñïëóàòèðóéòå óñòðîéñòâî îêîëî âîäû èëè â ìåñòàõ ñ ïîâûøåííîé âëàæíîñòüþ ìàêñ 90 S Äëÿ òîãî òîá...

Page 373: ...o del SIE y de las baterías Por favor lea todas las instrucciones antes de poner en funcionamiento el equipo y guarde este manual para referencia en el futuro PELIGRO Este SIE contiene VOLTAJES MORTALES Todas las reparaciones y el servicio técnico deben ser efectuados SOLAMENTE POR PERSONAL DE SERVICIO TÉCNICO AUTORIZADO No hay NINGUNA PARTE QUE EL USUARIO PUEDA REPARAR dentro del SIE ADVERTENCIA ...

Page 374: ...s pertinentes S Nunca deseche las baterías en el fuego Las baterías pueden explotar si se las expone a la llama Säkerhetsföreskrifter VIKTIGA SÄKERHETSFÖRESKRIFTER SPARA DESSA FÖRESKRIFTER Den här anvisningen innehåller viktiga instruktioner som du ska följa under installation och underhåll av UPS enheten och batterierna Läs alla instruktioner innan du använder utrustningen och spara den här anvis...

Page 375: ...ell standard och installationsföreskrifter får inte den totala utrustning som anslutits till uttagen på denna UPS enhet ha läcksström som överstiger 3 5 milliampere VIKTIGT S Batterierna kan innebära en risk för elektrisk stöt eller brännskada från kortsluten starkström Iakttag lämpliga försiktighetsåtgärder Service ska utföras av utbildad servicepersonal med kunskap om batterierna och nödvändiga ...

Page 376: ...he shipping cartons and packing materials for the carrier or place of purchase and file a claim for shipping damage If you discover damage after acceptance file a claim for concealed damage To file a claim for shipping damage or concealed damage 1 File with the carrier within 15 days of receipt of the equipment 2 Send a copy of the damage claim within 15 days to your service representative NOTE Ch...

Page 377: ...ssories packaged with the cabinet 2 Carefully lift the cabinet out of the outer carton 3 Discard or recycle the packaging in a responsible manner or store it for future use Place the cabinet in a protected area that has adequate airflow and is free of humidity flammable gas and corrosion Checking the Accessory Kit Verify that the following additional items are included with the UPS S UPS user s gu...

Page 378: ...m 61 to 76 cm 24 to 30 inches deep Checking the Rail Kit Accessories Verify that the following rail kit items are included for each cabinet S Left rail assembly Left rail Rear rail 3 M4 8 pan head screws S Right rail assembly Right rail Rear rail 3 M4 8 pan head screws S Rail hardware kit 10 M6 16 pan head screws 10 M6 cage nuts 2 rear stop brackets 2 M3 8 pan head screws S Mounting bracket kit 2 ...

Page 379: ...ll the EBM s directly below the UPS so that all wiring between the cabinets is installed behind the front covers and is inaccessible to users NOTE Mounting rails are required for each individual cabinet To install the rail kit 1 Assemble the left and right rails to the rear rails as shown in Figure 4 Do not tighten the screws Adjust each rail size for the depth of your rack Rear Rails Right Rail L...

Page 380: ...y to the rear of the rack M6 16 Pan Head Screws 6 places Front of Rack M6 Cage Nuts 6 places Tighten adjustment screws after rail attachment 3 places each rail Position 4 Position 1 Figure 5 Securing the Rails 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for the other rail assembly 6 Tighten the three adjustment screws in the middle of each rail assembly 7 If installing optional cabinets repeat Step 1 through Step 6 fo...

Page 381: ...e Mounting Brackets Forward Position Shown 10 If installing optional cabinets repeat Steps 8 and 9 for each cabinet 11 Slide the UPS and any optional cabinets into the rack 12 Secure the front of the UPS to the rack using two M6 16 pan head screws and two M6 cage nuts on each side see Figure 7 Install the bottom screw on each side through the bottom hole of the mounting bracket and the bottom hole...

Page 382: ...d Screw Figure 8 Securing the Back of the Cabinet Optional Rackmount Wiring Installation This section explains S Installing the UPS including connecting the UPS internal batteries S Connecting any optional EBMs Installing the UPS NOTE Do not make unauthorized changes to the UPS otherwise damage may occur to your equipment and void your warranty NOTE Do not connect the UPS power cord to utility unt...

Page 383: ...ill not harm personnel Connect the cables quickly and firmly 2 Connect the internal battery connector see Figure 10 Up to 1500 VA models Unclip the top rightmost white connector from the battery panel and move it to the left to connect to the white connector at the top left Connect red to red and black to black Press the two parts tightly together to ensure a proper connection Clip the wires of th...

Page 384: ... the left front cover Reinstall the two screws on the right side of the right front cover 5 If you are installing power management software connect your computer to one of the communication ports or optional connectivity card see page 53 For the communication ports use an appropriate cable not supplied 6 If your rack has conductors for grounding or bonding of ungrounded metal parts connect the gro...

Page 385: ... EBM cable knockout see Figure 11 NOTE Use care to protect the LCD control panel and the connected ribbon cable from damage esc Knockout for EBM Cable Figure 11 Removing the EBM Cable Knockout 2 Remove the front cover of each EBM see Figure 12 To remove the cover remove and retain the two screws on the right side of the cover Grasp the sides of the cover and slide the cover to the left and then aw...

Page 386: ...re 12 Removing the EBM Front Cover 3 For the bottom or only EBM remove the EBM cable knockout on the top of the EBM front cover See Figure 12 for the location of the top EBM cable knockout 4 If you are installing more than one EBM for each additional EBM remove the EBM cable knockout on the top and bottom of the EBM front cover See Figure 12 for the location of the EBM cable knockouts ...

Page 387: ...or on the UPS battery panel and connect it to the EBM connector on the EBM Press the two parts tightly together to ensure a proper connection 2000 3000 VA models Connect red to red black to black and green to green Press the two parts tightly together to ensure a proper connection All models To connect a second EBM unclip the EBM connector on the first EBM and pull gently to extend the wiring to t...

Page 388: ...epeat for each additional EBM 8 Verify that all wiring connecting the UPS and EBM s is installed behind the front covers and is inaccessible to users 9 Return to Step 4 on page 25 to continue the UPS installation Tower Installation The Eaton 9130 tower cabinet comes fully assembled and ready to connect CAUTION The cabinet is heavy see page 78 Removing the cabinet from its carton requires a minimum...

Page 389: ... UPS otherwise damage may occur to your equipment and void your warranty NOTE Do not connect the UPS power cord to utility until after installation is completed To install the UPS 1 Remove the UPS front cover see Figure 14 To remove the cover push down on the top of the cover and pull the cover toward you to unclip it from the cabinet NOTE A ribbon cable connects the LCD control panel to the UPS D...

Page 390: ... together connecting red to red and black to black Press the two parts tightly together to ensure a proper connection Figure 15 Connecting the UPS Internal Batteries 3 Remove the two screws from the screw mounts and retain see Figure 15 4 Place the battery connector between the screw mounts Reinstall the two screws to hold the connector in place 5 Replace the UPS front cover To replace the cover v...

Page 391: ... Installations with one EBM only Remove the cable retention clip covering the right for 1000 1500 VA models or upper for 2000 3000 VA models battery connector Retain the clip and screws 3 Installations with more than one EBM For all EBMs except the last EBM remove the cable retention clips covering both battery connectors Do not remove the clip from the second battery connector on the last EBM Ret...

Page 392: ...00 3000 VA User s Guide S 164201718 Rev 3 www eaton com powerquality 33 1000 1500 VA Models 2000 3000 VA Models Remove cable retention clip Plug in EBM cable Rotate clip Reinstall cable retention clip Figure 16 Connecting the EBMs ...

Page 393: ...protected equipment 4 Make any necessary provisions for cord retention and strain relief 5 Models without an attached power cord Plug the detachable UPS power cord into the input connector on the UPS rear panel 6 Plug the UPS power cord into a power outlet The UPS front panel display illuminates and shows a status of UPS initializing 7 Verify that the UPS transfers to Standby mode UPS on standby 8...

Page 394: ...sing is disabled until manually re enabled by output frequency setting NOTE At initial startup input voltage auto sensing is disabled by default When manually enabled by output voltage setting at the next AC startup the UPS sets output voltage according to input line voltage After the subsequent startup auto sensing is disabled until manually re enabled by output voltage setting 14 If you installe...

Page 395: ...INSTALLATION Eaton 9130 UPS 700 3000 VA User s Guide S 164201718 Rev 3 www eaton com powerquality 36 ...

Page 396: ... and configuring bypass settings load segments and battery settings Control Panel Functions The UPS has a four button graphical LCD with backlight It provides useful information about the UPS itself load status events measurements and settings see Figure 17 Power On Indicator green On Battery Indicator yellow Bypass Indicator yellow Alarm Indicator red On Off Button Escape Up Down Enter esc Figure...

Page 397: ... On The UPS has an active alarm or fault See Troubleshooting on page 101 for additional information Changing the Language Press and hold the first button on the left for approximately three seconds to select the language menu This action is possible from any LCD menu screen Display Functions As the default or after 15 minutes of inactivity the LCD displays the start screen The backlit LCD automati...

Page 398: ... Output V Hz Input V Hz Bypass V Hz Input Line Events Battery V min Control Go to Bypass Transfers the UPS system to internal Bypass mode When this command is active the option changes to Go to Normal Start Battery Test Starts a manual battery test See Testing New Batteries on page 72 Reset Error State Clears a Battery Test Failed alarm Load Segments Load segment 1 ON OFF Load segment 2 ON OFF The...

Page 399: ... Used Force Bypass Remote Shutdown Delayed Shutdown On Generator Building Alarm 1 Active High Low See Programmable Signal Inputs on page 59 RS232 3 Not Used High cXSlot Serial Delayed Shutdown High cXSlot Signal Remote Shutdown Low Relay Configuration UPS ok On Bypass On Battery Battery Low Ext Charger On See Relay Output Contacts on page 58 Standard UPS ok RS232 1 Battery Low RS232 8 On Battery c...

Page 400: ...on page 49 Load Segment 1 No Delay Load Segment 2 No Delay Automatic on Battery Shutdown Disabled No Delay 1s 2s 32767s Shutdown cancels if utility returns before the delay expires See Configuring Load Segments on page 49 Load Segment 1 Disabled Load Segment 2 Disabled Start on Battery NOTE Utility must be present and output enabled at initial UPS startup Enabled Disabled After initial startup bat...

Page 401: ...Battery Strings 0 1 2 10 See Configuring the UPS for EBMs on page 51 1 Battery Charge Mode ABM Cycling Constant ABM Cycling Temperature Compensated Charging Enabled Disabled If Disabled the default charger voltages for 25 C 77 F are assumed Enabled Battery Charge to Restart Not Checked 10 20 100 If a percentage is selected automatic restart if enabled occurs when the battery s charge reaches the s...

Page 402: ...ies as needed and provides filtered power protection to your equipment The UPS may at times silently implement a High Alert mode usually when incoming utility conditions are unfavorable In High Alert mode the UPS disables the battery support test to ensure maximum capacity from the batteries if needed The UPS will remain in High Alert for 24 hours or until changed by a Power Strategy command befor...

Page 403: ...ent of a UPS overload or internal failure the UPS transfers your equipment to utility power Battery mode is not available and your equipment is not protected however the utility power continues to be passively filtered by the UPS The indicator illuminates The UPS remains in Bypass mode for at least 5 seconds if the bypass source remains acceptable If three transfers to Bypass occur within 10 minut...

Page 404: ...er occurs first If utility fails while the UPS is in Standby mode the logic power supply turns off in approximately 10 seconds If the UPS is waiting on commands and utility fails unit and logic power turn off in approximately 30 seconds UPS Startup and Shutdown To start up or shut down the UPS see S Starting the UPS on page 45 S Starting the UPS on Battery on page 46 S UPS Shutdown on page 47 Star...

Page 405: ... using this feature the UPS must have been powered by utility power with output enabled at least once NOTE Battery start can be disabled See the Start on Battery setting in User Settings on page 40 To start the UPS on battery 1 Press the button on the UPS front panel until the UPS front panel display illuminates and shows a status of UPS starting The UPS cycles through Standby mode to Battery mode...

Page 406: ...YPASS From Bypass to Normal Mode Press any button to activate the menu options then select CONTROL and GO TO NORMAL Retrieving the Event Log To retrieve the Event Log through the display 1 Press any button to activate the menu options then select EVENT LOG 2 Scroll through the listed events To retrieve the Event Log through the serial port 1 From the communication device connected to the serial po...

Page 407: ...an configure the setting for a delayed transfer with the amount of delay determined by the amount of overload as shown in Table 19 on page 84 Bypass Voltage Low Limit The default disables a transfer to Bypass if the measured bypass voltage level is below the nominal output voltage minus 15 You can configure the setting for another percentage of nominal This setting can be overruled by the Qualify ...

Page 408: ...g can be overruled by the Qualify Bypass setting Configuring Load Segments Load segments are sets of receptacles that can be controlled by power management software or through the display providing an orderly shutdown and startup of your equipment For example during a power outage you can keep key pieces of equipment running while you turn off other equipment This feature allows you to save batter...

Page 409: ...ect SETTINGS USER SETTINGS and AUTOMATIC START DELAY 2 Set the restart delay for one load segment and ENTER to confirm 3 Set the other load segment if applicable 4 Select AUTOMATIC ON BATTERY SHUTDOWN 5 Set the shutdown delay for one load segment and ENTER to confirm 6 Set the other load segment if applicable NOTE Load segment On Off commands issued through the Control menu overrule the user setti...

Page 410: ...splay to activate the menu options then select SETTINGS USER SETTINGS and NUMBER OF BATTERY STRINGS 2 Use the or buttons to select the number of battery strings according to your UPS configuration All UPS and EBM Cabinets Number of Battery Strings UPS only internal batteries 1 default UPS 1 EBM 3 UPS 2 EBMs 5 UPS 3 EBMs 7 UPS 4 EBMs 9 NOTE If 0 is selected no batteries are connected and all batter...

Page 411: ...n Normal mode with no active alarms S The batteries must be fully charged S The bypass voltage must be acceptable S No manual battery test was initiated previously in the same charging cycle To pass the battery test the battery voltage must remain above the threshold value during discharge Configuring Automatic Restart The UPS automatically restarts if utility returns after the output was shut off...

Page 412: ... S Relay output contacts S Programmable signal inputs S Modem operation S LanSafe Power Management Software Figure 18 shows the location of the communication options and control terminals on a typical UPS See Rear Panels on page 91 for rear panel diagrams for each model Communication Bay USB REPO RS 232 Standard Relay Output Contact Output Input Figure 18 Communication Options and Control Terminal...

Page 413: ...ities through the USB and RS 232 communication ports or through a connectivity card in the available communication bay The UPS supports two serial communication devices according to the following table Independent Multiplexed Communication Bay USB RS 232 Any connectivity card Available Not in use Any connectivity card Not in use Available NOTE You can configure relays signal inputs and the serial ...

Page 414: ...munication Port Pin Assignment Pin Number Signal Name Function Direction from the UPS 1 DCD Battery Low signal1 3 Out 2 RxD Transmit to external device Out 3 TxD Receive from external device2 In 4 DTR PnP from external device tied to Pin 6 In 5 GND Signal common tied to chassis 6 DSR To external device tied to Pin 4 Out 7 RTS No connection In 8 CTS On Battery signal1 3 Out 9 RI 8 12 Vdc power Out ...

Page 415: ...SNMP Card Figure 20 Optional Connectivity Cards Remote Emergency Power off REPO is used to shut down the UPS from a distance This feature can be used for shutting down the load and the UPS by thermal relay for instance in the event of room overtemperature When REPO is activated the UPS shuts down the output and all its power converters immediately The UPS remains on to alarm the fault WARNING The ...

Page 416: ...PO Figure 21 REPO Connections You can set the REPO polarity See the REPO Input Polarity setting in User Settings on page 40 NOTE Depending on user configuration the pins must be shorted or open to keep the UPS running To restart the UPS reconnect re open the REPO connector pins and turn on the UPS manually Maximum resistance in the shorted loop is 10 ohm NOTE The following models have the REPO por...

Page 417: ...Reinforced insulation to the utility is required The relay output contacts have a maximum rating of 30 Vac 1A and 60 Vdc 2A nominal values Table 5 shows the options for the relay output contacts Table 5 Relay Output Configuration Options Signal Description UPS ok Activated when the UPS is feeding the load on inverter or on bypass and no alarms are active On Bypass Activated when the UPS is NOT on ...

Page 418: ... UPS is forced to static bypass operation regardless of the bypass status Remote Shutdown If active the UPS output turns off after a user defined remote shutdown delay The batteries continue charging Inactive input does not abort the shutdown countdown and does not cause the UPS to start up automatically Delayed Shutdown and restart If active the UPS output turns off after a user defined delayed s...

Page 419: ...tware select serial port installation For the UPS manufacturer and model select Powerware and Powerware 9130 If the Powerware brand options are not available in your version of the software select Generic UPSs for the manufacturer and Generic XCP for the model LanSafe software provides up to date graphics of UPS power and system data and power flow It also gives you a complete record of critical p...

Page 420: ... of the system with a vacuum cleaner For full battery life keep the UPS at an ambient temperature of 25 C 77 F NOTE If the UPS requires any type of transportation verify that the UPS is unplugged and turned off and then disconnect the UPS internal battery connector see Figure 24 on page 64 for rackmount models or Figure 26 on page 67 for tower models NOTE The batteries in the UPS are rated for a 3...

Page 421: ...OTE DO NOT DISCONNECT the batteries while the UPS is in Battery mode Batteries can be replaced easily without turning the UPS off or disconnecting the load If you prefer to remove input power to change the batteries see UPS Shutdown on page 47 Consider all warnings cautions and notes before replacing batteries WARNING S Servicing should be performed by qualified service personnel knowledgeable of ...

Page 422: ...t attempt to alter any battery wiring or connectors Attempting to alter wiring can cause injury S Disconnect charging source prior to connecting or disconnecting battery terminals Replacing Rackmount UPS Internal Batteries CAUTION The UPS internal batteries are heavy see page 78 Use caution when handling the heavy batteries The internal batteries are located behind the UPS right front cover behind...

Page 423: ... is not connected to an EBM unclip the EBM cable and move it to the left out of the way See Figure 24 Up to 1500 VA Models 2000 3000 VA Models Internal Battery Connector Internal Battery Connector EBM Cable Battery Cover Plate Battery Cover Plate Figure 24 Disconnecting the UPS Internal Batteries Shown without EBMs 4 Grasp an edge of the battery cover plate and pull it forward gently Remove and re...

Page 424: ...small amount of arcing may occur when connecting the internal batteries This is normal and will not harm personnel Connect the cables quickly and firmly 8 Reconnect the internal battery connector Connect red to red and black to black Press the two parts tightly together to ensure a proper connection 9 Up to 1500 VA models only If the EBM cable is not connected to an EBM clip the EBM cable back int...

Page 425: ...ated behind the UPS front cover The internal batteries are packaged together as one unit for easier handling To replace the batteries in the UPS 1 Remove the UPS front cover see Figure 25 To remove the cover push down on the top of the cover and pull the cover toward you to unclip it from the cabinet NOTE A ribbon cable connects the LCD control panel to the UPS Do not pull on the cable or disconne...

Page 426: ...n the two screws holding the battery cover plate Grasp an edge of the battery cover plate and pull it forward gently Remove and retain the battery cover plate 4 Carefully pull the handle on the battery tray and slide the battery package slowly out onto a flat stable surface use two hands to support the battery package See Recycling the Used Battery or UPS on page 73 for proper disposal NOTE Verify...

Page 427: ... and will not harm personnel Connect the cables quickly and firmly 7 Reconnect the internal battery connector Connect red to red and black to black Press the two parts tightly together to ensure a proper connection 8 Place the connector between the screw mounts and reinstall the retained screws 9 Replace the UPS front cover To replace the cover verify that the ribbon cable is protected then insert...

Page 428: ... requires a minimum of two people To replace the EBMs 1 Remove the front cover of each EBM See Figure 27 To remove the cover remove and retain the two screws on the right side of the cover Grasp the sides of the cover and slide the cover to the left and then away from the cabinet Bottom EBM Cable Knockout underneath cover Top EBM Cable Knockout EBM Cover Hook Figure 27 Removing the EBM Front Cover...

Page 429: ... EBM cable knockout 7 If you are installing more than one new EBM for each additional EBM remove the EBM cable knockout on the top and bottom of the EBM front cover See Figure 27 for the location of the EBM cable knockouts 8 Plug the new EBM s into the UPS For reference see Figure 13 on page 28 Up to 1500 VA models Connect the EBM connector from the UPS to the EBM connector on the EBM Press the tw...

Page 430: ...ng Tower EBMs CAUTION The EBM is heavy see page 78 Lifting the cabinet requires a minimum of two people To replace the EBMs 1 Unplug the EBM cable from the UPS If additional EBMs are installed unplug the EBM cable from the battery connector on each EBM 2 Replace the EBM s See Recycling the Used Battery or UPS on page 73 for proper disposal 3 For each replaced EBM remove the cable retention clip co...

Page 431: ...e Testing New Batteries To test new batteries 1 Plug the UPS into a power outlet for 48 hours to charge the batteries 2 Press any button to activate the menu options 3 Select CONTROL then START BATTERY TEST The UPS starts a battery test if the batteries are fully charged the UPS is in Normal mode with no active alarms and the bypass voltage is acceptable During the battery test the UPS transfers t...

Page 432: ...sed electrolyte is harmful to the skin and eyes It may be toxic CAUTION Do not discard the UPS or the UPS batteries in the trash This product contains sealed lead acid batteries and must be disposed of properly For more information contact your local recycling reuse or hazardous waste center CAUTION Do not discard waste electrical or electronic equipment WEEE in the trash For proper disposal conta...

Page 433: ...UPS MAINTENANCE Eaton 9130 UPS 700 3000 VA User s Guide S 164201718 Rev 3 www eaton com powerquality 74 ...

Page 434: ...patible Connectivity Cards ConnectUPS BD Web SNMP Card Relay Interface Card Communication Ports RS 232 DB 9 1200 9600 bps USB 9600 bps Signal Inputs 4 programmable signal inputs signal and signal return for indicating building alarms or other use Relay Output Contacts 1 three pole connector with 1 contact closure Table 9 Extended Battery Module Model List EBM Model Configuration Battery Voltage Fo...

Page 435: ...0W Figure 36 on page 93 PW9130G2500R XL2U 2500 VA 2250W Figure 40 on page 94 PW9130G3000R XL2U 3000 VA 2700W Figure 40 on page 94 PW9130i1000R XL2U 1000 VA 900W Figure 30 on page 91 PW9130i1500R XL2U 1500 VA 1350W Figure 34 on page 92 PW9130i2000R XL2U 2000 VA 1800W Figure 37 on page 93 PW9130i3000R XL2U 3000 VA 2700W Figure 41 on page 94 PW9130G1000R XL2UEU 1000 VA 900W Figure 30 on page 91 PW913...

Page 436: ...e 96 PW9130G3000T XL 3000 VA 2700W Figure 50 on page 96 PW9130i700T XL 700 VA 630W Figure 51 on page 97 PW9130i1000T XL 1000 VA 900W Figure 52 on page 97 PW9130i1500T XL 1500 VA 1350W Figure 53 on page 97 PW9130i2000T XL 2000 VA 1800W Figure 54 on page 97 PW9130i3000T XL 3000 VA 2700W Figure 55 on page 98 PW9130G1000T XLEU 1000 VA 900W Figure 52 on page 97 PW9130G2000T XLEU 2000 VA 1800W Figure 54...

Page 437: ...438 430 mm 3 4 17 2 16 9 19 5 kg 43 0 lb PW9130L2000R XL2U PW9130G2000R XL2U PW9130i2000R XL2U PW9130G2000R XL2UEU PW9130G2000R XL2UAU 86 5 438 600 mm 3 4 17 2 23 6 29 0 kg 63 9 lb PW9130L2500R XL2U PW9130G2500R XL2U PW9130G2500R XL2UEU PW9130L3000R XL2U PW9130G3000R XL2U PW9130i3000R XL2U PW9130G3000R XL2UEU PW9130G3000R XL2UAU 86 5 438 600 mm 3 4 17 2 23 6 29 5 kg 65 0 lb Model Rackmount EBM Dim...

Page 438: ...L2000T XL PW9130G2000T XL PW9130i2000T XL PW9130G2000T XLEU PW9130G2000T XLAU PW9130L3000T XL PW9130G3000T XL PW9130i3000T XL PW9130G3000T XLEU PW9130G3000T XLAU 325 214 412 mm 12 80 8 43 16 22 34 5 kg 76 1 lb Model Tower EBM Dimensions H W D Weight PW9130N1000T EBM 231 160 384 mm 9 09 6 30 15 12 18 5 kg 40 8 lb PW9130N1500T EBM 231 160 434 mm 9 09 6 30 17 09 24 3 kg 53 6 lb PW9130N3000T EBM 325 2...

Page 439: ...208V 12A 200 208 220 230 240 180 276 Vac PW9130G3000R XL2U 208V 14 4A 200 208 220 230 240 180 276 Vac PW9130i1000R XL2U 230V 4 3A 200 208 220 230 240 160 276 Vac PW9130i1500R XL2U 230V 6 5A 200 208 220 230 240 160 276 Vac PW9130i2000R XL2U 230V 8 7A 200 208 220 230 240 180 276 Vac PW9130i3000R XL2U 230V 13 0A 200 208 220 230 240 180 276 Vac PW9130G1000R XL2UEU 208V 4 8A 200 208 220 230 240 180 276...

Page 440: ...30 240 180 276 Vac PW9130i700T XL 230V 3 0A 200 208 220 230 240 160 276 Vac PW9130i1000T XL 230V 4 3A 200 208 220 230 240 160 276 Vac PW9130i1500T XL 230V 6 5A 200 208 220 230 240 160 276 Vac PW9130i2000T XL 230V 8 7A 200 208 220 230 240 180 276 Vac PW9130i3000T XL 230V 13 0A 200 208 220 230 240 180 276 Vac PW9130G1000T XLEU 208V 4 4A 200 208 220 230 240 180 276 Vac PW9130G2000T XLEU 208V 8 7A 200...

Page 441: ...0G2500R XL2U IEC C20 16A L6 20P to C20 coupler PW9130G3000R XL2U IEC C20 16A L6 20P to C20 coupler PW9130i1000R XL2U IEC C14 10A Schuko 10A to IEC 320 10A PW9130i1500R XL2U IEC C14 10A Schuko 10A to IEC 320 10A PW9130i2000R XL2U IEC C14 10A Schuko 10A to IEC 320 10A PW9130i3000R XL2U IEC C20 16A Schuko 16A to IEC 320 16A PW9130G1000R XL2UEU IEC C14 10A L6 20P to C14 coupler PW9130G2000R XL2UEU IEC...

Page 442: ...16A L6 20P to C20 coupler PW9130i700T XL IEC C14 10A Schuko 10A to IEC 320 10A PW9130i1000T XL IEC C14 10A Schuko 10A to IEC 320 10A PW9130i1500T XL IEC C14 10A Schuko 10A to IEC 320 10A PW9130i2000T XL IEC C14 10A Schuko 10A to IEC 320 10A PW9130i3000T XL IEC C20 16A Schuko 16A to IEC 320 16A PW9130G1000T XLEU IEC C14 10A L6 20P to C14 coupler PW9130G2000T XLEU IEC C14 10A L6 20P to C14 coupler P...

Page 443: ...as a frequency converter Output Overload Normal Mode 100 102 Activates Overload alarm Level 1 102 129 Load transfers to Bypass mode after 12 seconds Level 2 130 149 Load transfers to Bypass mode after 2 seconds Level 3 150 Load transfers to Bypass mode after 100 ms Level 4 NOTE Default configuration transfers immediately to Bypass at 102 Output Overload Bypass Mode 100 109 Activates Overload alarm...

Page 444: ...1 L6 30R 1 L6 20R 1 6 20R None PW9130i1000R XL2U 6 IEC 320 10A 2 IEC IEC 10A 1 IEC 320 10A to Schuko 3 strip PW9130i1500R XL2U 6 IEC 320 10A 2 IEC IEC 10A 1 IEC 320 10A to Schuko 3 strip PW9130i2000R XL2U 8 IEC 320 10A 1 IEC 320 16A 2 IEC IEC 10A 1 IEC 320 16A to Schuko 3 strip PW9130i3000R XL2U 8 IEC 320 10A 1 IEC 320 16A 2 IEC IEC 10A 1 IEC 320 16A to Schuko 3 strip PW9130G1000R XL2UEU 6 IEC 320...

Page 445: ...6 IEC 320 10A 2 IEC IEC 10A 1 IEC 320 10A to Schuko 3 strip PW9130i1000T XL 6 IEC 320 10A 2 IEC IEC 10A 1 IEC 320 10A to Schuko 3 strip PW9130i1500T XL 6 IEC 320 10A 2 IEC IEC 10A 1 IEC 320 10A to Schuko 3 strip PW9130i2000T XL 8 IEC 320 10A 1 IEC 320 16A 2 IEC IEC 10A 1 IEC 320 16A to Schuko 3 strip PW9130i3000T XL 8 IEC 320 10A 1 IEC 320 16A 2 IEC IEC 10A 1 IEC 320 16A to Schuko 3 strip PW9130G1...

Page 446: ...ass A CE per IEC EN 62040 2 Emissions Category C1 Immunity Category C2 EMC Emissions IEC 62040 2 ed2 2005 EN 62040 2 2006 Safety Conformance UL 1778 IEC 62040 1 1 IEC 60950 1 Agency Markings CE UL CUL NOM Operating Temperature 0 C to 40 C 32 F to 104 F in Online mode with linear derating for altitude NOTE Thermal protection switches load to Bypass in case of overheating Storage Temperature 20 C to...

Page 447: ...UEU PW9130G1000R XL2UAU 7 29 51 81 98 PW9130L1500R XL2U 5 23 48 67 91 PW9130i1500R XL2U PW9130G1500R XL2UAU 5 24 44 72 89 PW9130L2000R XL2U 6 33 59 88 112 PW9130G2000R XL2U PW9130i2000R XL2U PW9130G2000R XL2UEU PW9130G2000R XL2UAU 6 33 59 88 119 PW9130L2500R XL2U PW9130G2500R XL2U PW9130G2500R XL2UEU 4 26 47 71 95 PW9130L3000R XL2U 3 20 36 53 71 PW9130G3000R XL2U PW9130i3000R XL2U PW9130G3000R XL2...

Page 448: ...30 55 83 108 PW9130G1000T XL PW9130i1000T XL PW9130G1000T XLEU PW9130G1000T XLAU 7 29 51 81 98 PW9130L1500T XL 5 23 48 67 91 PW9130i1500T XL PW9130G1500T XLAU 5 24 44 72 89 PW9130L2000T XL 9 43 81 114 155 PW9130G2000T XL PW9130i2000T XL PW9130G2000T XLEU PW9130G2000T XLAU 12 48 93 137 161 PW9130L3000T XL 6 24 50 71 94 PW9130G3000T XL PW9130i3000T XL PW9130G3000T XLEU PW9130G3000T XLAU 7 32 51 87 1...

Page 449: ...V 9 Ah 1000 VA models 36 Vdc 3 12V 9 Ah 1500 VA models 48 Vdc 4 12V 9 Ah 2000 3000 VA models 96 Vdc 8 12V 9 Ah PW9130N1000T EBM 36 Vdc 2x3 12V 9 Ah PW9130N1500T EBM 48 Vdc 2x4 12V 9 Ah PW9130N3000T EBM 96 Vdc 2x8 12V 9 Ah Fuses Not applicable 4 30A 125 Vdc fuses per EBM Type Sealed maintenance free valve regulated lead acid with minimum 3 year float service life at 25 C 77 F Monitoring Advanced mo...

Page 450: ...able 10 on page 76 lists the rackmount models Table 11 on page 77 lists the tower models Input and output components for each model are listed in Table 15 through Table 21 pages 80 through 86 For a description of communication features see Figure 18 on page 53 Figure 28 Models PW9130L700R XL2U PW9130L1000R XL2U Figure 29 Model PW9130G1000R XL2U Figure 30 Models PW9130i1000R XL2U PW9130G1000R XL2UE...

Page 451: ... 9130 UPS 700 3000 VA User s Guide S 164201718 Rev 3 www eaton com powerquality 92 Figure 31 Model PW9130G1000R XL2UAU Figure 32 Model PW9130G1500R XL2UAU Figure 33 Model PW9130L1500R XL2U Figure 34 Model PW9130i1500R XL2U ...

Page 452: ...700 3000 VA User s Guide S 164201718 Rev 3 www eaton com powerquality 93 Figure 35 Model PW9130L2000R XL2U Figure 36 Model PW9130G2000R XL2U Figure 37 Models PW9130i2000R XL2U PW9130G2000R XL2UEU Figure 38 Model PW9130G2000R XL2UAU ...

Page 453: ...4201718 Rev 3 www eaton com powerquality 94 Figure 39 Models PW9130L2500R XL2U PW9130L3000R XL2U Figure 40 Models PW9130G2500R XL2U PW9130G3000R XL2U Figure 41 Models PW9130G2500R XL2UEU PW9130i3000R XL2U PW9130G3000R XL2UEU Figure 42 Model PW9130G3000R XL2UAU ...

Page 454: ... Eaton 9130 UPS 700 3000 VA User s Guide S 164201718 Rev 3 www eaton com powerquality 95 Figure 43 Model PW9130L700T XL Figure 44 Model PW9130L1000T XL Figure 45 Model PW9130L1500T XL Figure 46 Model PW9130L2000T XL ...

Page 455: ... Eaton 9130 UPS 700 3000 VA User s Guide S 164201718 Rev 3 www eaton com powerquality 96 Figure 47 Model PW9130L3000T XL Figure 48 Model PW9130G1000T XL Figure 49 Model PW9130G2000T XL Figure 50 Model PW9130G3000T XL ...

Page 456: ...00 VA User s Guide S 164201718 Rev 3 www eaton com powerquality 97 Figure 51 Model PW9130i700T XL Figure 52 Model PW9130G1000T XLEU and PW9130i1000T XL Figure 53 Model PW9130i1500T XL Figure 54 Models PW9130G2000T XLEU and PW9130i2000T XL ...

Page 457: ...S 700 3000 VA User s Guide S 164201718 Rev 3 www eaton com powerquality 98 Figure 55 Models PW9130G3000T XLEU and PW9130i3000T XL Figure 56 Model PW9130G700T XLAU Figure 57 Model PW9130G1000T XLAU Figure 58 Model PW9130G1500T XLAU ...

Page 458: ...SPECIFICATIONS Eaton 9130 UPS 700 3000 VA User s Guide S 164201718 Rev 3 www eaton com powerquality 99 Figure 59 Model PW9130G2000T XLAU Figure 60 Model PW9130G3000T XLAU ...

Page 459: ...SPECIFICATIONS Eaton 9130 UPS 700 3000 VA User s Guide S 164201718 Rev 3 www eaton com powerquality 100 ...

Page 460: ...h as Clock Set Done S Notices are announced by a beep every 5 seconds recorded in the Event Log and displayed on the LCD Examples are UPS on Battery and UPS on Bypass S Alarms are announced by a beep every second recorded in the Event Log displayed on the LCD and the Alarm indicator illuminates Examples are Output Overload and Heatsink Overtemperature Use the following troubleshooting chart to det...

Page 461: ...vary significantly Depending on the UPS load and number of Extended Battery Modules EBMs the Battery Low warning may occur before the batteries reach 25 capacity See Table 23 on page 88 for estimated runtimes On Bypass LED is on 1 beep every 5 seconds The UPS is in Bypass mode The equipment transferred to bypass utility power Battery mode is not available and your equipment is not protected howeve...

Page 462: ...ntact your service representative Battery Overvoltage LED is on 1 beep every second The UPS battery voltage is too high The UPS turns off the charger until the next power recycle Contact your service representative Site Wiring Fault LED is on 1 beep every second L Models Only Ground wire connection does not exist or the line and neutral wires are reversed in the wall outlet Have a qualified electr...

Page 463: ...y that the equipment is plugged into the UPS receptacles Battery test did not run or was interrupted One of the conditions listed in Running Automatic Battery Tests on page 52 was not present Resolve the condition then restart the test The UPS does not transfer to Bypass mode The bypass utility does not qualify Check the bypass utility The UPS is receiving bypass utility power that may be unstable...

Page 464: ...ountries Call your local service representative Please have the following information ready when you call for service S Model number S Serial number S Firmware version number S Date of failure or problem S Symptoms of failure or problem S Customer return address and contact information If repair is required you will be given a Returned Material Authorization RMA Number This number must appear on t...

Page 465: ...TROUBLESHOOTING Eaton 9130 UPS 700 3000 VA User s Guide S 164201718 Rev 3 www eaton com powerquality 106 ...

Page 466: ... repaired or replaced at a Company site or such other location as determined by Company If the Warranted Item is to be replaced by Company and the End User supplies a credit card number or purchase order for the value of the replacement Product Company will use commercially reasonable business efforts to ship via standard ground shipment and at no cost to the End User the replacement Warranted Ite...

Page 467: ...R WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY TITLE NON INFRINGEMENT AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE CORRECTION OF NON CONFORMITIES IN THE MANNER AND FOR THE PERIOD OF TIME PROVIDED ABOVE SHALL CONSTITUTE COMPANY S SOLE LIABILITY AND END USER S EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR FAILURE OF COMPANY TO MEET ITS WARRANTY OBLIGATIONS WHETHER CLAIMS OF THE END USER ARE BASE...

Page 468: ...End User of any Eaton 3105 5110 5115 5125 5130 9120 9125 9130 9135 9140 9150 9155 9170 and FERRUPS Products individually and collectively the Product and cannot be transferred This Guaranty applies even in the event that the Product is initially sold by Company for resale to an End User WHAT THIS GUARANTY COVERS For the lifetime of the Product Guarantor promises to repair or replace at Guarantor s...

Page 469: ...DAMAGE TO PROPERTY OR EQUIPMENT OTHER THAN THE PRODUCTS INCLUDING LOSS OF PROFITS OR REVENUE LOSS OF USE OF PRODUCTS LOSS OF DATA COST OF CAPITAL CLAIMS OF CUSTOMERS OF THE END USER OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER THE TOTAL CUMULATIVE LIABILITY OF COMPANY HEREUNDER WHETHER THE CLAIMS ARE BASED IN CONTRACT INCLUDING INDEMNITY IN TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR ST...

Page 470: ... 0 5 3 5 6 A B 3 4 ñ 4 9 0 ñ ñ ñ 2 ñ 5 0 1 2 13 4 0 3 5 67 4 6 0 5 8 9 8 9 8 9 0 0 1 2 3 0 41 5 1 0 5 6 3 7 3 4 7 0 ...

Page 471: ... ð ò 6 5 ð ï 2 1 ð D 43 D94 ð ð D 3 6 ð E 4 0 F 7 5D 7 3 GD H0 9 I 2 H J 4K I 2 9 J 4 2 ð D 2 ð 2 ð 6 D 4 3 8 34 4 L 5 0 8 M FE 2 3 8 34 2 4 7 8 I EJ 4 IF J 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 GD H 2 4 I H J 43 7 2 ð D 2 ð 2 ð 6 4 2 3 8 34 4 L 5 0 8 M FE 2 3 8 34 2 4 7 8 I EJ 4 IF J 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 7 3 ...

Page 472: ... 0 5 3 5 6 A B 3 4 ñ 4 9 0 ñ ñ ñ 2 ñ 5 7 8 1 5 CB N4 C N4 9 2 2 6 9 E 3 7 2 5 0 0 2 3 2 ...

Page 473: ... 0 5 3 5 6 A B 3 4 ñ 4 9 0 ñ ñ ñ 2 ñ 5 5 3 0 44 7 3 7 4 2 K 3 50 0 ...

Page 474: ... V ac Failure to use the unit at its rated voltage can permanently damage the unit or provide inadequate surge protection 2 5 Supplemental Enclosures The STV 25K must be installed inside an enclosure and located to prevent accidental contact with terminals during maintenance or servicing 2 6 Summary Alarm Contacts Summary alarm Form C 1 N O and 1 N C relay contacts rated 125 V ac 5 A max are provi...

Page 475: ...unit as illustrated 2 Put unit onto the DIN rail 3 Push unit downward until it stops 4 Push at the lower front edge to lock 5 Gently shake the unit to ensure that it is secure NOTE Press the button located at the top rear of the enclosure downward to unlock and remove the unit from the DIN rail 4 3 Applying Power Apply power to the unit and assure status indications are normal Under normal conditi...

Page 476: ......

Page 477: ......

Page 478: ...d e l l c o m s u p p o r t d e l l c o m Dell OptiPlex Systems Setup and Quick Reference Guide Guide de configuration et de référence rapide Guía de instalación y de referencia rápida Models DHS DHP and DHM ...

Page 479: ......

Page 480: ...w w w d e l l c o m s u p p o r t d e l l c o m Dell OptiPlex Systems Setup and Quick Reference Guide Models DHS DHP and DHM ...

Page 481: ... Dell Computer Corporation All rights reserved Reproduction in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Computer Corporation is strictly forbidden Trademarks used in this text Dell OptiPlex and the DELL logo are trademarks of Dell Computer Corporation Intel Pentium and Celeron are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Micr...

Page 482: ... 15 Solving Problems 16 Troubleshooting Tools 16 Using the Drivers and Utilities CD 17 Dell Diagnostics 18 When to Use the Dell Diagnostics 18 Starting the Dell Diagnostics 18 Running the Dell IDE Hard Drive Diagnostics 19 Regulatory Information 20 Limited Warranties and Return Policy 21 Limited Warranty for Dell Branded Hardware Products U S Only 21 Total Satisfaction Return Policy U S Only 24 Li...

Page 483: ...rn Policy Canada Only 28 Dell Software and Peripherals Canada Only 28 1 Year End User Manufacturer Guarantee Latin America and the Caribbean Only 29 Intel Warranty Statement for Pentium and Celeron Processors Only U S and Canada Only 31 ...

Page 484: ...ssis What Are You Looking For Find it Here A diagnostic program for my computer Drivers for my computer My computer documentation My device documentation D r i v e r s a n d U t i l i t i e s C D a l s o k n o w n a s t h e R e s o u r c e C D Documentation and drivers are already installed on your computer when shipped from Dell You can use the CD to reinstall drivers run the Dell Diagnostics or ...

Page 485: ... e support dell com The Dell Support website provides several online tools including Solutions Troubleshooting tips Knowledge Base articles Community Online discussion with other Dell customers Upgrades Upgrade information for components operating system drivers and information about online classes Customer Care Contact information order status warranty and repair information Downloads Drivers pat...

Page 486: ...p avoid the potential hazard of electric shock do not connect or disconnect any cables or perform maintenance or reconfiguration of this product during an electrical storm If your computer includes a modem the cable used with the modem should be manufactured with a minimum wire size of 26 American wire gauge AWG and an FCC compliant RJ 11 modular plug Before you clean your computer disconnect the ...

Page 487: ...hat the cables are not located where they can be stepped on or tripped over Do not push any objects into the openings of your computer Doing so can cause fire or electric shock by shorting out interior components Keep your computer away from radiators and heat sources Also do not block cooling vents Avoid placing loose papers underneath your computer do not place your computer in a closed in wall ...

Page 488: ...r location NOTICE To help avoid damaging a computer with a manual voltage selection switch set the switch for the voltage that most closely matches the AC power available in your location For Japan the voltage selection switch must be set to the 115 V position even though the AC power available in Japan is 100 V Also ensure that your monitor and attached devices are electrically rated to operate w...

Page 489: ...fore disconnecting the cable As you pull connectors apart keep them evenly aligned to avoid bending any connector pins Also before you connect a cable ensure that both connectors are correctly oriented and aligned Handle components and cards with care Do not touch the components or contacts on a card Hold a card by its edges or by its metal mounting bracket Hold a component such as a microprocesso...

Page 490: ...ou have an optional modem connect the phone line to the modem NOTICE Do not connect a modem cable to the network adapter Voltage from telephone communications can cause damage to the network adapter 3 Connect the monitor Align and gently insert the monitor cable to avoid bending connector pins Tighten the thumbscrews on the cable connectors NOTE Some flat panel displays and graphic cards support D...

Page 491: ...ck panel must be manually set to operate at the correct operating voltage NOTICE To help avoid damaging a computer with a manual voltage selection switch set the switch for the voltage that most closely matches the AC power available in your location For Japan the voltage selection switch must be set to the 115 V position even though the AC power available in Japan is 100 V Also ensure that your m...

Page 492: ... p W i t h E x p a n s i o n C a r d s NOTE If your system has two video connectors the integrated video connector is disabled and has a protective cap on it Use the expansion card connector as shown in the illustration monitor keyboard mouse speakers network USB A B C D LINE OUT monitor flat panel monitor speakers network ...

Page 493: ... C a r d s M i n i To w e r S e t u p W i t h E x p a n s i o n C a r d s NOTE If your system has two video connectors the integrated video connector is disabled and has a protective cap on it Use the expansion card connector as shown in the illustration monitor keyboard mouse speakers network USB monitor flat panel monitor speakers network ...

Page 494: ...XXXXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXX XXXXX Windows OS Professional OEM Nave Here Product Key XXXXX XXX XXX XXXXXXXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXX XXXXX Windows OS Professional OEM Nave Here A B C D A B C D power Microsoft Windows Product Key Microsoft Windows Product Key ...

Page 495: ...act Dell from the same location as your computer See Finding Information for Your Computer on page 5 for an example of the express service code and service tag numbers Express Service Code ___________________________ Service Tag Number ___________________________ Troubleshooting Tools The Dell Diagnostics tests various components in your computer and helps to identify the cause of computer problem...

Page 496: ...ivers and Utilities CD is about to begin installation 3 Click OK to continue To complete the installation respond to the prompts offered by the installation program 4 Click Next at the Welcome Dell System Owner screen 5 Select the appropriate System Model Operating System Device Type and Topic Drivers for Your Computer To display a list of device drivers for your computer 1 Click My Drivers in the...

Page 497: ...nsure that the device you want to test displays in system setup and is active Start the Dell Diagnostics from either your hard drive or from the Drivers and Utilities CD also known as the ResourceCD Starting the Dell Diagnostics From Your Hard Drive 1 Shut down and restart the computer 2 When the DELL logo appears press F12 immediately NOTE If you receive a message stating that no Diagnostics util...

Page 498: ...n from the menu that appears 6 Type 1 to start the ResourceCD menu 7 Type 2 to start the Dell Diagnostics 8 Select Run the 32 Bit Dell Diagnostics from the numbered list If multiple versions are listed select the version appropriate for your platform 9 When the Dell Diagnostics Main Menu appears select the test you want to run 10 When the tests are completed remove the CD 11 Close the test screen ...

Page 499: ...em has been designed and determined to be compliant with regulatory agency limits for EMI there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause interference with radio communications services which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on you are encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following mea...

Page 500: ... accordance with product instructions Failure to follow the product instructions or failure to perform preventive maintenance Problems caused by using accessories parts or components not supplied by Dell Products with missing or altered Service Tags or serial numbers Products for which Dell has not received payment THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS WH...

Page 501: ...puter on which such parts are installed The limited warranty on all Dell branded products begins on the date of the packing slip or invoice The warranty period is not extended if we repair or replace a warranted product or any parts Dell may change the availability of limited warranties at its discretion but any changes will not be retroactive What do I do if I need warranty service Before the war...

Page 502: ...d warranty we will replace any defective part with new or refurbished parts if we agree that it needs to be replaced When you contact us we will require a valid credit card number at the time you request a replacement part but we will not charge you for the replacement part as long as you return the original part to us within 30 days after we ship the replacement part to you If we do not receive t...

Page 503: ...cations software or an operating system that has been installed by Dell you must return the entire computer A different return policy applies to nondefective products purchased through Dell s Software and Peripherals division by customers of our Small and Medium Business divisions Those products may be returned within 30 days from the date on the packing slip or invoice but a fifteen percent 15 re...

Page 504: ...HICH VARY FROM PROVINCE TO PROVINCE DELL S RESPONSIBILITY FOR MALFUNCTIONS AND DEFECTS IN PRODUCT IS LIMITED TO REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT AS SET FORTH IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT FOR THE TERM OF THE WARRANTY PERIOD REFLECTED ON YOUR PACKING SLIP OR INVOICE EXCEPT FOR THE EXPRESS WARRANTIES CONTAINED IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT DELL DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUD...

Page 505: ...rned to us that prove to be defective in materials or workmanship If we are not able to repair the product we will replace it with a comparable product that is new or refurbished When you contact us we will issue a Return Material Authorization Number for you to include with your return You must return the products to us in their original or equivalent packaging prepay shipping charges and insure ...

Page 506: ... will be provided to you under the terms of the service contract Please refer to that contract for details on how to obtain service Dell s service contracts can be found online at www dell ca or by calling Customer Care at 1 800 847 4096 If you purchased through us a service contract with one of our third party service providers please refer to that contract mailed to you with your packing slip or...

Page 507: ...at has been installed by Dell the whole system must be returned along with any media and documentation that may have been included in the original shipment The Total Satisfaction Return Policy does not apply to Dell EMC storage products It also does not apply to products purchased through Dell s Software and Peripherals division For those products please instead refer to Dell s Software and Periph...

Page 508: ...y or an authorized Dell distributor in Latin America or the Caribbean will be free from defects in materials workmanship and design affecting normal use for a period of 1 year from the original purchase date Products for which proper claims are made will at Dell s option be repaired or replaced at Dell s expense Dell owns all parts removed from repaired products Dell uses new and reconditioned par...

Page 509: ...ts or any other indirect or consequential loss arising from negligence breach of contract or howsoever This Guarantee does not impair or affect mandatory statutory rights of the end user against and or any rights resulting from other contracts concluded by the end user with Dell and or any other seller Dell World Trade LP One Dell Way Round Rock TX 78682 USA Dell Computadores do Brasil Ltda CNPJ N...

Page 510: ...t Intel To request warranty service from Intel you should call Intel at 1 800 628 8686 during the warranty period during normal business hours Pacific Time excluding holidays Please be prepared to provide 1 your name address and telephone numbers 2 proof of purchase 3 this Intel warranty card 4 a description of the computer system including the brand and model and 5 an explanation of the problem N...

Page 511: ...These units are monitored for failures as part of our ongoing quality assurance process As a result today s microprocessors from Intel are among the most reliable components in computers What are Errata Exhaustive product testing can highlight differences between the actual behavior of the microprocessor and its specifications Sometimes the discrepancies are caused by a design defect or error whic...

Page 512: ... RV042G Gigabit Dual WAN VPN Router RV082 Dual WAN VPN Router RV016 Multi WAN VPN Router Package Contents VPN Router Power Adapter Cisco RV042 and RV042G or AC Power Cable Cisco RV082 and RV016 RJ45 Ethernet Cable Rack Mounting Kit Cisco RV016 and RV082 only Quick Start Guide Product CD ...

Page 513: ...er highly secure high performance reliable connectivity All of these routers can support a second Internet connection to ensure continuous connectivity or to increase available bandwidth and balance traffic Three models are available A comparison is provided below NOTE RV042 RV042G and RV082 have one dedicated Internet port and a DMZ Internet port RV016 has two dedicated Internet ports one dedicat...

Page 514: ...without exposing your LAN DMZ RV016 Use this port to connect the router to a DMZ host such as a web server or FTP server A DMZ allows public Internet traffic to access a specified computer on your network without exposing your LAN Cisco Small Business RV042 System DIAG DMZ Internet DMZMode 1 2 3 4 Internet 278822 278824 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 DMZ Internet Internet 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 DIAG System Internet DMZ...

Page 515: ...ver the Internet port DMZ Internet RV082 RV042 RV042G or DMZ RV016 Steady A device is connected to the DMZ Internet or DMZ port Flashing There is network activity over the port DMZ Mode RV082 RV042 RV042G Lit The DMZ Internet port is configured as a DMZ Unlit The DMZ Internet port is configured as a secondary Internet connection 1 4 1 8 Steady A device is connected to the numbered LAN port Flashin...

Page 516: ...one second To restore factory default settings If you are experiencing extreme problems with the router and have tried all other troubleshooting measures press and hold the Reset button for 30 seconds to restore the factory default settings All previously entered settings will be abandoned Security Slot Use the security slot on the side panel to attach a lock to protect the router from theft Power...

Page 517: ...ce the router on a flat surface near an electrical outlet WARNING Do not place anything on top of the router excessive weight could damage it Wall Mounting The router has two wall mount slots on the bottom panel To mount the router on a wall you need mounting hardware not included Suggested hardware is illustrated below not true to scale WARNING Insecure mounting might damage the router or cause i...

Page 518: ...ntil the screws fit snugly into the wall mount slots Rack Mounting RV082 or RV016 You can mount the RV082 or RV016 in a standard size 19 inch about 48 cm wide rack The router requires 1 rack unit RU of space which is 1 75 inches 44 45mm high Mounting brackets are provided CAUTION Do not overload the power outlet or circuit when installing multiple devices in a rack STEP 1 Place the router on a har...

Page 519: ... device to the Internet port of the router RV042 and RV042G Internet Port RV082 Internet Port 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 DMZ Inte rnet Inter net 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 DIAG System Interne t DMZ Interne t DMZ Mode Cisco Smal l Busi ness RV08 2 10 10 0 16 Po rt VPN Rout er 278825 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 DMZ Inte rnet Internet 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 DIAG Syste m Intern et DMZ Intern et DMZ Mode Cisc o Sma ll Bus ines s RV0 82 10...

Page 520: ...rnet switches connect an Ethernet cable from a numbered LAN port to the network device STEP 6 Power on the broadband network device s STEP 7 Use the power adapter RV042 and RV042G or the power cable RV082 and RV016 to connect the router to a power outlet The System status light is green STEP 8 Power on the other network devices Getting Started with the Configuration STEP 1 Connect a computer to a ...

Page 521: ...rd to prevent unauthorized access to your router For more information about all settings refer to the online Help and the Cisco Small Business RV0xx Series VPN Router Administration Guide Troubleshooting Tips If you have trouble connecting to the Internet or the web based configuration utility Verify that your web browser is not set to Work Offline Check the Local Area Connection settings for your...

Page 522: ...com go smallbizsupport Cisco Small Business Support and Resources www cisco com go smallbizhelp Cisco Small Business Firmware Downloads www cisco com go smallbizfirmware Enter the model number to find the latest firmrware Product Documentation Cisco Small Business Routers www cisco com go smallbizrouters Cisco Small Business Cisco Partner Central for Small Business Partner Login Required www cisco...

Page 523: ...red trademarks of Cisco and or its affiliates in the U S and other countries To view a list of Cisco trademarks go to this URL www cisco com go trademarks Third party trademarks mentioned are the property of their respective owners The use of the word partner does not imply a partnership relationship between Cisco and any other company 1110R 2010 2012 Cisco Systems Inc All rights reserved 78 19481...

Page 524: ... requires more technical knowledge and that would likely mean more downtime The ethernet connection would remain as designed so we could poll the motor current and other read only information Corrective Action Proposed Hardwire Spare PLC I O for the following SEP 03 04 PLC DO Remote Start PLC DI HOA in Auto PLC DI Running PLC DI Fault See attached Drawing revisions Cost Impact YES Budget Schedule ...

Page 525: ...Slim Line SL SLX Series Industrial Ethernet Switches Media Converter Installation Guide Revision 31 August 2009 http www sixnet com ...

Page 526: ... SL SLX 5MS MDM 1 5 port managed Ethernet land line modem with 5 10 100 ports x SL SLX 6ES 6 port unmanaged Ethernet switch x SL SLX 8ES 9ES 8 9 port unmanaged Ethernet switch with 8 or 9 10 100 ports x SL SLX 8MS 8 port managed Ethernet switch with 8 10 100 ports x SL SLX 8MG 1 8 port managed Ethernet switch with 8 Gigabit ports x SLX 10MG 1 10 port managed Gigabit Ethernet switch with 10 ports x...

Page 527: ...expressly disclaimed No oral or written information or advice given by Sixnet or Sixnet s representative shall create a warranty or in any way increase the scope of this warranty This limited warranty is in lieu of all other warranties whether oral or written expressed or implied Sixnet s liability shall not exceed the price of the individual units which are the basis of the claim In no event shal...

Page 528: ... Mbps on their RJ45 ports depending on the model Each of these ports will independently auto sense the speed duplex mdi mdix crossover and polarity allowing you to use straight crossed or even mis wired cables Some models also have one or more fiber optic ports for making noise immune connections up to 120 km Performance Specifications These general specifications apply to these industrial Etherne...

Page 529: ...hrow away these devices in the standard trash Contact Sixnet regarding proper disposal 9RoHS RoHS compliance These devices comply with the RoHS directive and are consider lead and other hazardous substance free Hazardous Locations x CE per ATEX directive and EN50021 EN60079 15 Zone 2 EEx nA II T4 X 40 c d Ta d 85 C x UL per UL1604 Class I Div 2 Groups A B C D UL File E192531 x CSA per C22 2 213 Cl...

Page 530: ...re is typically one power LED that is ON if either power input P1 or P2 has power applied to it On the managed models and some unmanaged models there are two Power LEDs that indicate if there is power applied to the respective input ACT LNK LED This is the Yellow LED on models with two LEDs per RJ45 port ON yellow not flashing Indicates that there is a proper Ethernet connection Link between the p...

Page 531: ...D indicates status of the Discrete From PLC input on the modem There is an input screw terminal that can be connected as shown in the diagram When voltage is applied to the From PLC input the LED will be ON When no voltage is applied the LED will be OFF To PLC Output LED 5MS MDM Models Only This LED can indicate Power Status or Modem Connection status There is an output screw terminal That can be ...

Page 532: ...e to allow enough room to route your Ethernet copper or fiber optic cables SL or SLX ES models in Lexan case Mounting Removal 1 2 B A Recommended DIN rail mounting steps 1 Hook the top back of the unit over the DIN rail 2 Push the bottom of the unit towards the DIN rail until it snaps into place Recommended DIN rail removal steps A Insert screwdriver into DIN clip and pry until the bottom of the u...

Page 533: ...back of the DIN rail clip on the unit over the din rail 2 Push the bottom of the unit towards the DIN rail until it snaps into place Recommended DIN rail removal steps A Push the whole unit down to free the bottom of the DIN rail clip See blue circle area B Pull the bottom of the unit away from the DIN rail C Unhook the top of unit and remove it from the DIN rail C ...

Page 534: ...ommended DIN rail mounting steps 1 Hook the top back of the unit over the DIN rail 2 Push the bottom of the unit towards the DIN rail until it snaps into place Recommended DIN rail removal steps A Insert screwdriver into DIN clip and pry until the bottom of the unit releases from the din rail B Unhook the top of the DIN clip and remove the unit from DIN rail ...

Page 535: ...1 Hook the top back of the DIN rail clip on the unit over the din rail 2 Push the bottom of the unit towards the DIN rail until it snaps into place Recommended DIN rail removal steps A Push the whole unit down to free the bottom of the DIN rail clip See blue circle area B Pull the bottom of the unit away from the DIN rail C Unhook the top of unit and remove it from the DIN rail C ...

Page 536: ...Packaging Use for direct panel mounting to a flat surface with up to 8 screw for older units or up to 12 for newer units see guide to right 4 00 10 16 cm 4 50 11 43 cm 4 35 11 05 cm 2 25 5 71 cm 2 25 5 71 cm Typical for SC or ST fiber 0 40 1 02 cm Snaps to standard DIN rail EN50022 35 mm Removable Screw Block 1 50 3 81 cm 3 00 7 62 cm 0 30 0 76 cm 0 39 0 99 cm 2 3 5 Ports 6 8 9 Ports C Removable f...

Page 537: ...ars on newer models w metal DIN clip accept up to a 12 screw Direct to panel mounting guide for newer models 12 screw 10 screw 8 screw 6 screw Typ for SC or ST Fiber 5 05 12 83 cm Mechanical Dimensions for SL SLX 5 8MS 1 4 5 with up to 2 Fiber Ports 5 05 Removable Screw Block Console Port s C 6 screw 8 screw 10 screw 12 screw Direct to panel mounting guide for newer models Panel mounting ears on n...

Page 538: ...ept up to a 6 screw on older models see to the right for newer models Mechanical Dimensions for SL SLX 8ES 6 7 with 3 Fiber Ports 2 60 6 60 cm 2 60 6 60 cm 3 82 9 70 cm 5 05 12 83 cm for 6 screw Removable Screw Block 1 60 4 07 cm 5 20 13 21 cm 0 80 2 04 cm 0 40 1 02 cm typical 0 15 0 38 cm 1 92 4 88 cm 1 90 4 83 cm For 12 screw 5 20 13 21 cm For 10 screw 5 15 13 08 cm For 8 screw 5 10 12 95 cm For...

Page 539: ... Panel mounting ears accept up to a 6 screw on earlier models and up to a 12 screw on newer models Snaps to standard DIN Rail EN50022 35 mm 1 88 4 78 cm Console Ports 4 70 11 94 cm 0 50 1 27 cm 1 37 3 49 cm 2 75 6 98 cm Mechanical Dimensions for SL SLX 8MG with 8 Gigabit Ports 6 screw 8 screw 10 screw 12 screw Panel mounting ears accept up to a 12 screw Direct to panel mounting guide Snaps to stan...

Page 540: ...2 cm 2 15 5 46 cm 2 15 5 46 cm Typical for SFP Xcvrs 0 50 1 27 cm 6 02 15 29 cm 2 13 5 40 cm Mechanical Dimensions for SLX 16MS 1 2 88 7 31 cm 6 screw 8 screw 10 screw 12 screw Panel mounting ears accept up to a 12 screw Direct to panel mounting guide Snaps to standard DIN Rail EN50022 35 mm Removable Screw Block Removable DIN clip for direct panel mounting Panel mounting ears accept up to a 12 sc...

Page 541: ...at from the product and its components This technique effectively utilizes the heavy gauge all aluminum case as a large heat sink Therefore you may notice the case becoming warm during operation especially with large loads such as all ports linked and active This is normal operation For best performance it is recommended that a DIN rail spacer such as an end clamp be used between the switch and ad...

Page 542: ...that is applied to the switches power terminals See the wiring diagrams on the next page Screw Torque When tightening the screws be careful to tighten to a max torque of 5 in lb 0 57 Nm WIRING WARNINGS BEFORE PERFORMING ANY WIRING TO THESE SWITCHES MAKE SURE x THE AREA IS CURRENTLY NONHAZARDOUS ESPECIALLY WHEN WORKING IN CLASS I DIV 2 OR ZONE 2 HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS x TO TURN OFF THE POWER TO THE SW...

Page 543: ...ply Alarm Output Load opt Chassis GND panel Chassis GND panel Power Alarm Wiring for SL SLX 5 8MS Managed Switches Chassis GND panel Single DC Supply P1 P2 Front of Switch connectors Back of Switch DIN rail Redundant DC Power Single DC Power P2 P1 Dual DC Supplies Chassis GND panel Power Wiring for SL SLX 5 8 9ES Unmanaged Switches and SL 2ES Media Converter Front of Switch connectors Front of Swi...

Page 544: ...ingle DC Supply Dual DC Supplies Chassis GND panel Chassis GND panel To PLC P1 Power PLC Wiring for SL SLX 5MS MDM Ethernet Modem P2 P1 OK One DC Supply Chassis GND panel Dual DC Supplies OK P1 P2 Single DC Power Redundant DC Power Alarm Output Load Chassis GND panel optional optional Alarm Output Load Front of Switch connectors Back of Switch DIN rail Power Alarm Wiring for SL SLX 8MG Managed Swi...

Page 545: ...nt DC Power Single DC Power P2 P1 Dual DC Supplies Power and Alarm Wiring For SL SLX 6ES Unmanaged Switches Single DC Supply Front of Switch connectors Back of Switch DIN rail Redundant DC Power Single DC Power P2 P1 OK Dual DC Supplies Alarm Output Load opt Chassis GND panel OK P1 P2 Alarm Output Load opt Chassis GND panel Power and Alarm Wiring for SLX 10 16 18 Mx Managed Switches Front of Switc...

Page 546: ... cable wiring will work Pin 6 Pin 6 Pin 6 Pin 2 Ethernet Plug Connector Pin Positions RJ45 Cable Distance The maximum cable length for 10 100 1000BaseT is typically 100 meters 328 ft Ethernet Fiber Wiring Guidelines Depending on the model these industrial Ethernet switches may have up to four fiber optic ports All 100 Mbps fiber ports are available with dual SC or ST style connectors They are also...

Page 547: ... Typical Fiber Ports on an SL 8MG Typical SC style connector on a SL 5ES 2 3SC Typical ST style connector on a SL 5ES 2 3ST Typical SC style connector on a SLX 5MS 4 5SC Typical ST style connector on a SLX 5MS 4 5ST Typical SC style connector on a SLX 8xS SLX 8MG with no transceivers installed SLX 8MG with four transceivers installed ...

Page 548: ...heck the LED s corresponding to the ports that each of the devices are connected to Ensure that for each port that is in use the LED is on or blinking If a port LED is off go back and check for connectivity problems between that port and the network device connected to that particular port In addition the color of the LED should indicate the speed for which your device is connected at see prior se...

Page 549: ...pter RJ45F Pin Signal Name Signal Name DB9F Pin 1 RI DSR in DTR out 4 2 DCD in N C n c 3 DTR out DSR in 6 4 GND GND 5 5 RXD in TXD out 3 6 TXD out RXD in 2 7 CTS in RTS out 7 8 RTS out CTS in 8 USB Console Port Wiring Newer models of these switches may also have an USB port instead of or in addition to the RS232 port Use a standard USB cable with a mini USB plug on one end and an A type USB plug o...

Page 550: ...ces managed models only Web see online demo text Telnet SSH CLI command line interface and SNMP see software manual for supported MIBs Open source linux managed models only The Linux Advantage Contact Sixnet for more information MAC addresses 1024 on unmanaged ES models 2048 on managed MS models 8192 on Gigabit MG models Memory bandwidth 3 2 Gbps on ES MS models 32 Gbps on MG models Latency for 10...

Page 551: ...lass 1 FDA 21 CFR 1040 10 and 1040 11 SFP Mini Gbic SFP pluggable Ports many types available Note On the Gigabit MG models these ports are pluggable and accept many different types of pluggable SFP Mini Gbic transceiver modules for Gigabit fiber connections Gigabit SFP ports Up to 4 Port types supported Gigabit fiber multimode fiber singlemode fiber long haul singlemode fiber single strand and mor...

Page 552: ... as switch input voltage Maximum current output 0 5 Amp Power Input Power input Redundant Input Terminals Input power typical with all ports active at 100 Mbps 2 0 W 2 port converter with 1 fiber 2 0 W 5 port unmanaged w 0 fiber 3 0 W 5 port unmanaged w 1 fiber 5 0 W 6 port unmanaged w 2 fiber 4 0 W 8 port unmanaged w 0 fiber 5 0 W 9 port unmanaged w 1 fiber 8 0 W 8 port unmanaged w 3 fiber 3 6 W ...

Page 553: ...A C22 2 213 Class I Div 2 EN50021 EN60079 15 Zone2 CE ATEX Eye safety fiber models IEC60825 1 Class 1 FDA 21 CFR 1040 10 and 1040 11 MTBF Mean Time Between Failure 1 000 000 hours typical per MIL HDBK 217F2 Ground Benign at 35 C RoHS and WEEE RoHS Pb free and WEEE compliant ISO9001 2000 Certified Total Quality company Mechanical Ingress protection IP30 all models Packaging and protection UL94V0 Le...

Page 554: ...ase supply us with as many details about the problem as you can The information you supply will be written on the RMA form and supplied to the repair department before your unit arrives This helps us to provide you with the best service in the fastest manner Normally repairs are completed in two days Sometimes difficult problems take a little longer to solve If you need a quicker turnaround ship t...

Page 555: ......

Page 556: ......

Page 557: ......

Page 558: ......

Page 559: ......

Page 560: ......

Page 561: ... ǁǁǁ ǁŝůĚƐƚŽŶĞ ĐŽŵ 2 0DLQ 6WUHHW 3K 3HQWLFWRQ D DQDGD 9 ...

Page 562: ... ǁǁǁ ǁŝůĚƐƚŽŶĞ ĐŽŵ 2 0DLQ 6WUHHW 3K 3HQWLFWRQ D DQDGD 9 ...

Page 563: ...UNIT HEATERS FOR STEAM OR HOT WATER Rosemex Products HEATING 01 2003 ...

Page 564: ...ass tubes heavy 0 035 wall is standard on HS and VS models optional on all other models and recommended for steam over 5 PSIG All coils tested with 200 PSIG air pressure under water Motors specially selected and tested thermally protected permanently lubricated for a minimum of 20 000 hours on H and HS models and 20 000 hours on V and VS models Motors totally enclosed on H and HS models Motor moun...

Page 565: ...n open door The throw shown in the perfor mance tables applies to draft free build ings with relatively stable temperatures When heating only a small area within a cold environment experience shows that the published throw may be reduced by as much as 50 UNIT LOCATION Unit Heaters should be spotted to aim the discharge towards the source of heat loss but precautions should be taken to avoid blasti...

Page 566: ... 117 7 113 1 4 850 3 60 2060 540 2 14 42 HS 137 572 142 0 137 2 103 1 4 1075 3 60 2930 772 2 14 50 HS 175 729 182 0 175 0 120 1 3 820 4 90 2690 467 3 15 49 HS 205 851 211 2 204 2 109 1 3 1100 4 90 3830 667 4 15 59 HS 265 1106 274 7 265 4 109 1 2 1075 10 10 5000 672 4 16 63 STEAM UNIT HEATERS LESS THAN 15 PSI TABLE 1 STEAM 2 PSIG ENT AIR 60 F MOTOR 115V 1 60 CAT No EDR COND lb h MBH FIN TEMP NOM HP...

Page 567: ... VS 247 1029 255 8 246 9 106 3 4 820 13 00 4960 1580 2 27 56 41 41 VS 279 1159 288 0 278 5 99 3 4 1075 13 00 6660 2120 4 35 71 50 56 VS 361 1501 372 9 360 1 113 3 4 820 13 00 6260 1273 2 37 75 54 51 VS 413 1719 425 5 412 5 105 3 4 1075 13 00 8430 1716 3 48 97 66 70 STEAM UNIT HEATERS LESS THEN 15 PSI TABLE 3 STEAM 2 PSIG ENT AIR 60 F MOTOR 115V 1 60 CAT No EDR COND lb hr MBH FIN TEMP NOM HP NO CON...

Page 568: ... 10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 0 970 1 54 1 45 1 37 1 27 1 19 1 11 1 03 0 96 0 88 0 81 0 74 0 67 2 966 1 59 1 50 1 41 1 32 1 24 1 16 1 08 1 00 0 93 0 85 0 78 0 71 5 961 1 64 1 55 1 46 1 37 1 29 1 21 1 13 1 05 0 97 0 90 0 83 0 76 10 953 1 73 1 64 1 55 1 46 1 38 1 29 1 21 1 13 1 06 0 98 0 91 0 84 15 945 1 80 1 71 1 61 1 53 1 44 1 34 1 28 1 19 1 12 1 04 0 97 0 90 20 939 1 86 1 77 1 68 1 58 1 50...

Page 569: ... s office Reception rooms Public libraries Museums Court rooms Lobbies Laboratories Recreation halls Waiting rooms Restaurants Night clubs Department stores upper floors Bowling alleys Gymnasiums Lounges General open offices Drafting rooms Kitchens Washrooms and toilets Cafeterias Department stores main floors Supermarkets Swimming pools Garages Laundries Foreman s office Halls and corridors Facto...

Page 570: ...0 CFM 6150 RPM 1140 HP 1 15 20 30 40 20 30 40 20 30 40 15 20 25 30 10 15 20 30 15 20 30 40 15 20 30 40 15 20 30 40 15 20 30 40 15 20 30 40 15 20 30 40 20 30 40 20 30 40 20 30 40 HOT WATER CAPACITIES HORIZONTAL PROJECTION HIGH SPEED LOW SPEED 19 2 2 60 1 90 98 23 2 3 2 2 6 106 18 1 1 90 1 00 96 22 1 2 3 1 4 104 15 9 1 10 0 40 92 19 9 1 4 0 6 100 13 8 0 70 0 20 88 17 8 0 9 0 3 96 26 7 2 70 2 80 101 ...

Page 571: ......

Page 572: ...5 20 25 30 40 15 20 25 30 40 20 25 30 40 20 25 30 40 20 25 30 40 33 0 6 65 0 52 120 40 0 7 80 0 95 132 27 6 3 75 0 25 110 34 3 4 50 0 35 122 23 0 2 30 0 10 102 29 4 2 94 0 16 113 18 0 1 50 0 05 93 24 5 2 00 0 08 104 16 4 1 00 0 02 90 21 0 1 30 0 04 98 36 6 7 45 0 85 103 43 4 8 55 1 10 111 33 6 4 55 0 35 100 40 3 5 25 0 65 108 32 5 3 25 0 19 98 38 8 3 88 0 26 106 27 0 2 25 0 09 92 34 3 2 75 0 14 10...

Page 573: ...5 30 40 20 25 30 40 45 6 8 25 1 05 143 57 6 9 50 1 40 164 41 9 5 50 0 50 136 49 9 6 65 0 52 150 37 5 3 75 0 25 128 44 0 4 40 0 34 140 30 4 2 40 0 10 115 38 2 3 00 0 17 129 27 2 1 75 0 06 109 34 5 2 30 0 10 123 49 9 9 00 1 30 119 57 6 10 25 1 60 128 48 0 6 25 0 62 117 55 9 7 45 0 85 126 45 5 4 55 0 36 114 51 5 5 15 0 48 121 41 9 3 30 0 20 109 49 5 4 00 0 28 119 37 9 2 50 0 15 105 48 7 3 25 0 19 118...

Page 574: ...or application details page 3 and Table 7 for noise level 2 2 ENTERING WATER TEMPERATURE F 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 30 0 96 1 04 1 11 1 18 1 26 1 33 1 41 1 48 1 55 1 63 1 70 1 78 1 85 1 93 40 0 88 0 95 1 02 1 10 1 17 1 25 1 32 1 39 1 47 1 54 1 61 1 69 1 76 1 83 50 0 80 0 87 0 94 1 01 1 09 1 16 1 23 1 30 1 37 1 45 1 52 1 59 1 66 1 74 60 0 73 0 79 0 86 0 93 1 00 1 07 1...

Page 575: ...H 32 H 40 HS 43 HS 51 V 38 V 48 VS 57 VS 67 H 44 H 58 1 12 1 5 1550 H 50 H 60 H 70 HS 73 HS 95 V 70 V 84 VS 89 VS 103 H 82 H 96 H 114 1 6 2 1075 H 80 H 98 HS 97 HS 113 1 4 2 5 1100 H 102 H 122 HS 117 HS 137 V 50 V 80 VS 137 VS 157 H 136 H 166 V 90 V 106 V 108 V 130 1 4 3 6 1075 V 66 V 96 1 4 4 6 1725 H 144 H 174 HS 175 HS 205 H 194 H 234 1 3 4 9 1100 H 250 HS 265 1 2 10 10 1075 V 124 V 140 VS 171 ...

Page 576: ... 125 V 300 370 VS 361 413 18 162 V 520 VS 595 19 1 2 250 14 16 18 30 43 5 8 9 13 1 2 30 3 4 6 30 2 2 1 2 3 6 7 8 3 1 16 5 5 16 4 5 16 1 3 4 2 1 4 3 8 16 NC 1 2 13 NC 26 1 2 6 4 147 16 167 16 181 2 16 2 3 4 5 6 3 4 8 CATALOGUE NO FAN DIAM LOW OUT A B C D E F WEIGHT STANDARD TEMP H 18 H 24 HS 25 HS 31 10 19 12 3 4 9 17 3 1 1 4 39 H 26 H 36 HS 39 HS 47 16 1 2 H 32 H 40 HS 43 HS 51 17 1 2 H 44 H 58 14...

Page 577: ...hall be totally enclosed on H and HS models Motors or supports shall be resiliently mounted Motors on H and HS units shall be mounted on formed welded and plated heavy gauge wire support On V and VS units motors and blades shall be removable through fan opening FANS Fan blades shall be aluminum and bal anced for quietness DIFFUSERS Louver fin model H and louver cone model V diffusers shall have in...

Page 578: ...MECAR METAL 1560 Marie Victorin blvd Saint Bruno Quebec J3V 6B9 Tel 450 653 1002 Fax 450 653 3464 Products http www rosemex com ...

Page 579: ... ǁǁǁ ǁŝůĚƐƚŽŶĞ ĐŽŵ 2 0DLQ 6WUHHW 3K 3HQWLFWRQ D DQDGD 9 ...

Page 580: ...a timely and effective manner 1 Check the schedules for proper damper locations within the building Visually inspect the damper for damage 2 Lift or handle damper using sleeve or frame Do not lift damper using blades linkage actuators or jackshafts When handling multiple section assemblies use sufficient support to evenly lift at each section mullion see drawing Do not drag step on or apply excess...

Page 581: ...bracing to support the damper horizontally Support ductwork in area of damper to prevent sagging due to damper weight Cycle the dampers by hand before installation to ensure freedom of movement Fasten damper sections together with 10 x 19mm sheet metal screws in 6mm diameter nuts and bolts tack or spot welds Attachments should be spaced a maximum of 6 152mm on centers and a maximum of 3 76mm from ...

Page 582: ...imilar graphite based dry lubricant as regular lubricating oil will attract dirt Bearings Synthetic oil impregnated and ball bearings without grease fittings do not require lubrication Ball bearings with grease fittings require only minimal grease Closure Remove foreign materials that may be interfering with blade closure or effective sealing of the blades with each other or with the frame Operati...

Page 583: ...laced at our option Alumavent shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products Alumavent will not be responsible for any installation or removal costs Alumavent will not be responsible for any service work or back charges without prior written authorization QR INFO SCAN Page 4 of 4 CD IOM August 2012 195 HEALEY ROAD BOLTON ON L7E 5B2 TEL 905 857 4700 FAX 905 ...

Page 584: ... ǁǁǁ ǁŝůĚƐƚŽŶĞ ĐŽŵ 2 0DLQ 6WUHHW 3K 3HQWLFWRQ D DQDGD 9 Ƭ ...

Page 585: ... OBNFQMBUF DPOUBJOJOH UIF NPEFM OVNCFS BOE JOEJWJEVBM TFSJBM OVNCFS 0OMZ RVBMJmFE QFSTPOOFM TIPVME JOTUBMM UIJT GBO 1FSTPOOFM TIPVME IBWF B DMFBS VOEFSTUBOEJOH PG UIFTF JOTUSVDUJPOT BOE TIPVME CF BXBSF PG HFOFSBM TBGFUZ QSFDBVUJPOT NQSPQFS JOTUBMMBUJPO DBO SFTVMU JO FMFDUSJD TIPDL QPTTJCMF JOKVSZ EVF UP DPNJOH JO DPOUBDU XJUI NPWJOH QBSUT BT XFMM BT PUIFS QPUFOUJBM IB BSET 0UIFS DPOTJEFSBUJPOT NBZ...

Page 586: ... GBO BOE BDDFTTPSJFT XIJMF JO TUPSBHF SFFOIFDL BO PSQPSBUJPO XJMM OPU CF SFTQPOTJCMF GPS EBNBHF EVSJOH TUPSBHF 5IFTF TVHHFTUJPOT BSF QSPWJEFE TPMFMZ BT B DPOWFOJFODF UP UIF VTFS Indoor 5IF JEFBM FOWJSPONFOU GPS UIF TUPSBHF PG GBOT BOE BDDFTTPSJFT JT JOEPPST BCPWF HSBEF JO B MPX IVNJEJUZ BUNPTQIFSF XIJDI JT TFBMFE UP QSFWFOU UIF FOUSZ PG CMPXJOH EVTU SBJO PS TOPX 5FNQFSBUVSFT TIPVME CF FWFOMZ NBJOU...

Page 587: ...JHJOBM SVTU QSFWFOUJWF DPBUJOH XJUI QFUSPMFVN TPMWFOU BOE DMFBO XJUI MJOU GSFF DMPUIT 1PMJTI BOZ SFNBJOJOH SVTU GSPN TVSGBDF XJUI DSPDVT DMPUI PS mOF FNFSZ QBQFS BOE PJM P OPU EFTUSPZ UIF DPOUJOVJUZ PG UIF TVSGBDFT 5IPSPVHIMZ XJQF DMFBO XJUI 5FDUZM TIMBOE OD PS UIF FRVJWBMFOU PS IBSE UP SFBDI JOUFSOBM TVSGBDFT PS GPS PDDBTJPOBM VTF DPOTJEFS VTJOH 5FDUZM 3VTU 1SFWFOUJWF 8 PS UIF FRVJWBMFOU Removing...

Page 588: ...CSBDLFUT UP UIF TVQQPSU BOHMFT PO UPQ MTP IPSJ POUBM BMJHONFOU DBO CF NBEF CZ MPPTFOJOH UIF CFBSJOHT GSPN UIF CFBSJOH QMBUF 3FNPWBM PG UIF FOUJSF QPXFS QBDL NPUPS ESJWFT BOE XIFFM GPS NBJOUFOBODF PS DMFBOJOH DBO CF BDDPNQMJTIFE CZ SFNPWJOH UIF CSFBUIFS UVCF BOE GBTUFOFST Pre Starting Checks IFDL BMM GBTUFOFST BOE TFUTDSFXT GPS UJHIUOFTT 5IF XIFFM TIPVME SPUBUF GSFFMZ BOE CF BMJHOFE BT TIPXO JO mHV...

Page 589: ...F DIFDLFE UP BWPJE TFSJPVT EBNBHF UP UIF NPUPS XIFO TQFFE JT WBSJFE Operation CW CWB FGPSF TUBSUJOH VQ PS PQFSBUJOH GBO DIFDL BMM GBTUFOFST GPS UJHIUOFTT O QBSUJDVMBS DIFDL UIF TFUTDSFXT JO XIFFM IVC BOE QVMMFZT JG BQQMJDBCMF 8IJMF JO UIF 0 QPTJUJPO PS CFGPSF DPOOFDUJOH UIF GBO UP QPXFS UVSO UIF GBO XIFFM CZ IBOE UP CF TVSF JU JT OPU TUSJLJOH UIF WFOUVSJ PS BOZ PCTUBDMF 4UBSU UIF GBO BOE TIVU JU P...

Page 590: ...SPQFS NBJOUFOBODF QSPHSBN XJMM IFMQ UIFTF VOJUT EFMJWFS ZFBST PG EFQFOEBCMF TFSWJDF FMU FBSJOH BJOUFOBODF 8 6OJU FMUT UFOE UP TUSFUDI BGUFS B QFSJPE PG UJNF 5IFZ TIPVME CF DIFDLFE QFSJPEJDBMMZ GPS XFBS BOE UJHIUOFTT 8IFO SFQMBDJOH CFMUT VTF UIF TBNF UZQF BT TVQQMJFE XJUI UIF VOJU BUDIFE CFMUT TIPVME BMXBZT CF VTFE PO VOJUT XJUI NVMUJ HSPPWF QVMMFZT PS CFMU SFQMBDFNFOU MPPTFO UIF UFOTJPOJOH EFWJDF ...

Page 591: ...light duty in clean atmosphere Recommended Relubrication Frequency in Months 05 G VOVTVBM FOWJSPONFOU DPOEJUJPOT FYJTU FYUSFNF UFNQFSBUVSF NPJTUVSF PS DPOUBNJOBOUT NPSF GSFRVFOU MVCSJDBUJPO JT SFRVJSFE HPPE RVBMJUZ MJUIJVN CBTF HSFBTF DPOGPSNJOH UP SBEF DPOTJTUFODZ TVDI BT UIPTF MJTUFE IFSF NBZ CF VTFE CW Direct Drive Centrifugal Sidewall Exhaust Fan Parts List NOTE BDI GBO CFBST B NBOVGBDUVSFS T ...

Page 592: ...1SBDUJDFT GPS 6TFST BOE OTUBMMFST PG OEVTUSJBM BOE PNNFSDJBM BOT QSPWJEFT BEEJUJPOBM TBGFUZ JOGPSNBUJPO 5IJT QVCMJDBUJPO DBO CF PCUBJOFE GSPN OUFSOBUJPOBM OD BU XXX BNDB PSH Troubleshooting 8 3 FGPSF UBLJOH BOZ DPSSFDUJWF BDUJPO NBLF DFSUBJO VOJU JT OPU DBQBCMF PG PQFSBUJPO EVSJOH SFQBJST 130 64 033 5 7 5 0 YDFTTJWF PJTF PS 7JCSBUJPO BE FBSJOHT 3FQMBDF 8IFFM VOCBMBODF MFBO BOE SFNPWF BMM EJSU CVJM...

Page 593: ...de trips the spring rod 2 Mount end switch bracket to damper frame or ductwork using 10 x 1 2 in self drilling sheet metal screws Damper Frame 1 2 in 14 NPSM Damper Blade Damper Tie Bar Spring Rod 2 3 3 4 1 End Switch Installation On WD 100 Series Dampers Damper Frame 1 2 in 14 NPSM Damper Blade Damper Tie Bar Spring Rod 2 3 3 4 1 End Switch Installation On WD 200 300 Series Dampers Document Numbe...

Page 594: ... ǁǁǁ ǁŝůĚƐƚŽŶĞ ĐŽŵ 2 0DLQ 6WUHHW 3K 3HQWLFWRQ D DQDGD 9 ȋ Ȍ ...

Page 595: ...on is adjustable between 10 to 90 The AFB24 SR AFB24 SR S AFX24 SR and AFX24 SR S actuator is shipped at 5 5 from full fail safe to provide automatic compression against damper gaskets for tight shut off ATTENTION AFB24 SR S and AFX24 SR S cannot be tandem mounted on the same damper or valve shaft Only On Off and MFT AF models can be used for tandem mount applications Dimensions Inches mm K7 2 sup...

Page 596: ...us Approved and have a 5 year warranty and be manufactured under ISO 9001 International Quality Control Standards Actuators shall be as manufactured by Belimo Wiring Diagrams 1 Provide overload protection and disconnect as required 2 CAUTION Equipment Damage Actuators may be connected in parallel Power consumption and input impedance must be observed 2 Up to 4 actuators may be connected in paralle...

Page 597: ...side of the diaghram Both the A AFS 222 and A AFS 262 will accept a 0 25 O D rigid metallic tubing via the integral compression ferrule and nut The enclosure cover guards against accidental contact with the live switch terminal screws and the setpoint adjusting screw Both units also contain a 1 2 conduit knockout in the cover of the enclosure as well as a diaphragm calibration spring and a snap ac...

Page 598: ...44 3 6 cm 3 18 8 0 cm 6 25 15 8 cm 0 44 1 1 cm Side View 4 46 11 3 cm High Pressure Inlet 2 313 5 8 cm 3 34 8 4 cm Low Pressure Inlet End View 2305 Pleasant View Rd Middleton Industrial Park Middleton WI 53562 PH 608 831 2585 FAX 608 831 7407 DISPLAYS RELATIVE HUMIDITY TEMPERATURE PRESSURE CURRENT AIR QUALITY ACCESSORIES PR 14 262 ...

Page 599: ...ge linear Action stem up open A to AB Sizes to 2 End ﬁtting NPT female ends Materials Body Seat Stem Plug Packing Disc bronze bronze stainless steel brass spring loaded TFE composition EPDM bronze stainless steel stainless steel stainless steel spring loaded TFE Teﬂon ANSI class ANSI 250 up to 400 psi below 150 F Leakage ANSI class IV Max steam inlet 35 psi 241 kPa 100 psi 689 kPa Media temperatur...

Page 600: ...on stem up open B to AB stem up open B to AB Sizes to 2 End ﬁtting NPT female ends Materials Body Seat Stem Plug Packing Disc bronze bronze stainless steel brass spring loaded TFE none ANSI class ANSI 250 up to 400 psi below 150 F Leakage ANSI III Media temperature water 20 F to 250 F 7 C to 120 C Maximum ΔP water 35 psi 241 kPa Rangeability 500 1 Valve weights G314 G315 D G320 G320D G325 G332 D G...

Page 601: ...ulse Voltage 800V Type of action 1 Control Pollution Degree 3 Application For fail safe proportional modulation of globe valves in HVAC steam and hydronic systems Actuator sizing will be dictated by the valve size selection All valve selections should be done in accordance with the flow parameters and system specifications The actuator is mounted directly to the globe valve bonnet by means of its ...

Page 602: ...s shall be as manufactured by Belimo Wiring Diagrams Actuators may also be powered by 24 VDC Only connect common to neg leg of control circuits A 500 resistor converts the 4 20 mA control signal to 2 10 VDC Actuators with plenum cable do not have numbers use color codes instead Meets cULus or UL and CSA Standard requirements without the need of an electrical ground connection WARNING Live Electric...

Page 603: ...0 F 5 to 30 C except energy conservation models Accessories replacement knobs and faceplates for double trim plate for mounting two T22s or T26s Applications Use for line voltage control of heating and cooling equipment Series T25 Action on Increase of Temperature R B Y Low Stage R B Y High Stage SeriesT26 Action on Increase of Temperature 1 2 3 t28cd eps t28cd eps T25 T26 Series Action Diagrams S...

Page 604: ...to 2 2 TWO STAGE T25A 1C Knob Two SPDT switches Two stage heating cooling or one stage heating and one stage cooling None 1 3 4 1 2 1 4 1 3 1 5 3 1 7 between stages T25A 16C Concealed 1 For the thermostat guard refer to G Series Thermostat and Humidistat Guards Catalog Page LIT 1922145 2 Can also be used where one unit provides both heating and cooling by adding a jumper between terminals 2 and 3 ...

Page 605: ...CS has a fixed trip point of below 0 55A When the current in the conductor exceeds this threshold the sensor will be Closed The sensor will indicate Open when the current is interrupted or falls to 0A These units perform in any application where the amount of AC current flow is sufficient to indicate the operating status of the sensed load The A MCS and A MSCS Series are covered by ACI s Five 5 Ye...

Page 606: ... 150A 0 55 Amps Warning Not intended to be used in Life Safety Applications or for use in any hazardous locations C 2 2 001 0 188 2x 2 001 0 188 2x 2 500 1 991 0 942 Solid Core Split Core 2 645 2 356 0 940 TEMPERATURE ACCESSORIES INTERFACE DEVICES GAS SENSORS CURRENT PRESSURE RELATIVE HUMIDITY 2305 Pleasant View Road Middleton WI 53562 PH 888 967 5224 www workaci com A MCS ...

Page 607: ...120 277 Vac 10 Amp Resistive 28 Vdc 480 VA Pilot Duty 240 277 Vac 480 VA Ballast 277 Vac 600 Watt Tungsten 120 Vac N O 240 Watt Tungsten 120 Vac N C 1 3 HP for N O 120 240 Vac 1 6 HP for N C 120 240 Vac 1 4 HP for N O 277 Vac 1 8 HP for N C 277 Vac Coil Current 30 mA 10 Vac 32 mA 12 Vac 42 mA 24 Vac 50 mA 30 Vac 25 mA 120 Vac 12 mA 10 Vdc 14 mA 12 Vdc 16 mA 24 Vdc 18 mA 30 Vdc Coil Voltage Input 1...

Page 608: ...HU SSURYHG E 033 5 5 5HOLDEOH RQWUROV RUSRUDWLRQ 0 1 6 2 1 6 6XSSO 9ROWDJHV 9 9 9 PD RPPXQLFDWLRQV HGLFDWHG 2 1HW SRUW IRU FRPPXQLFDWLRQV WR KRVW 0 3UR RP RU 0 3UR6 V FRQWUROOHUV DXG IL HG DW NESV 8QLYHUVDO QSXWV XQLYHUVDO LQSXWV ELW QDORJ 9 9 P WKHUPLVWRU LJLWDO GU FRQWDFW PSHGDQFH 0 IRU 9 UDQJH 0 IRU 9 UDQJH IRU P UDQJH N SXOO XS IRU WKHUPLVWRU GU FRQWDFW UDQJH SXOVH FRXQWLQJ VXSSRUWV IORZ PHWHU...

Page 609: ...OO UHH 7HO D ZZZ UHOLDEOHFRQWUROV FRP QHW LV D UHJLVWHUHG WUDGHPDUN RI 6 5 6 5 GRHV QRW HQGRUVH DSSURYH RU WHVW SURGXFWV IRU FRPSOLDQFH ZLWK 6 5 VWDQGDUGV RPSOLDQFH RI OLVWHG SURGXFWV WR UHTXLUHPHQWV RI 6 5 6WDQGDUG LV WKH UHVSRQVLELOLW RI WKH QHW 0DQXIDFWXUHV VVRFLDWLRQ 0 7 LV D UHJLVWHUHG WUDGHPDUN RI WKH 0 SDQVLRQ 0RGXOH D RXW 1HWZRUN LULQJ RQWUROOHU 0RGXOH 0RGXOH 2 VZLWFKHV LQ 6KLHOG 6KLHOG UR...

Page 610: ...0 100 BaseT 2 EIA 485 76 8 kbps max 1 EIA 232 115 2 kbps max PC or modem SMART Net port 16 sensors max Browser Support IE 8 Firefox 3 Chrome 5 Safari 5 or greater JavaScript must be enabled on client Flash required for animations and flood fill Universal Inputs 12 universal inputs 12 bit A D Converter Analog 0 5 VDC 0 10 VDC 4 20 mA thermistor Digital dry contact Impedance 1 M for 0 5 VDC range 1 ...

Page 611: ...TP Provides standard email communications for broadcasting email alarms SMS GSM GPRS modem SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol 12 Inputs Universal ranges Expandable using MACH ProPoint expansion modules Maximum possible inputs of 128 8 Outputs Outputs 1 4 are wired to unpopulated sockets Outputs 5 8 are universal no sockets Expandable outputs using MACH ProPoint expansion modules Maximum possi...

Page 612: ...77 475 9301 Tel 250 475 2036 Fax 250 475 2096 www reliablecontrols com 3 6 Network Wiring Controller 1 Controller 2 Controller 3 EOL switches in EOL switches in EOL switches out Shield Shield Ground Network shields connected with wire nut Shield SUBMITTAL MACH ProWebSys R E L I A B L E C O N T R O L S M A C H S Y S T E M Power Wiring MACH Zone MACH ProWebSys MACH ProWebSys Enclosure 1 Enclosure 2 ...

Page 613: ...ultiple A DS WP B Data Sharing WriteProperty B DS WPM B Data Sharing WriteProperyMultiple B DS V A Data Sharing View A DS M A Data Sharing Modify A DS COV A Data Sharing COV A DS COV B Data Sharing COV B DS COVU A Data Sharing COV Unsolicited A DS COVU B Data Sharing COV Unsolicited B AE N A Alarm and Event Notification A AE N E B Alarm and Event Notification External B AE N I B Alarm and Event No...

Page 614: ...ent_En able Inactive_Text Notification_Class Notify_Type Out_Of_Service Polarity Present_Value Reliability Time_Delay Timed Override 1026 UNSIGNED Writable Allows time limited over ride of the point Change_Of_State_Count_Today 1037 UNSIGNED Read Only Number of state changes since 12 00 am Binary Output Yes Yes Acked_Transitions Active_Text Change_Of_State_Count Change_ Of_State_Time Description El...

Page 615: ...lag to indicate if the exception can be deleted when out of date Active Index 1025 UNSIGNED Indicates what Exception or Weekly Schedule is active or the Schedule Default Trend Log Yes Yes Acked_Transitions Align_Intervals Client_COV_Increment COV_Re subscription_Interval Description Event_Enable Event_Time_Stamps Interval_Offset Last_Notify_Re cord Log_DeviceObjectProperty Log_Interval Notificatio...

Page 616: ...DQF 7 1 6 3 7 2 1 6 3 U R M H F W QJLQHHU SSURYHG E 66 5 5 5HOLDEOH RQWUROV RUSRUDWLRQ 0 1 6 2 1 6 6XSSO 9ROWDJHV IURP FRQWUROOHU 66 9 P 66 2 9 P LVSOD RXU µGLJLWV 6L µ FKDUDFWHUV 6L LFRQV XWR 0DQXDO RRO HDW DQ DQG DQ 6SHHG LVSOD UHD PP PP µ µ 7HPSHUDWXUH 6SHFLILFDWLRQV ELW FRQYHUWHU 5DQJH R WR R R WR R R R UHVROXWLRQ 8VHU FDOLEUDWHG WR R R DFFXUDF XPLGLW 5DQJH IRU PRGHOV UHVROXWLRQ UDQJH 5 DFFXUD...

Page 617: ...Q WRROV DOORZ DQ RSHUDWRU WR FRQYHQLHQWO YLHZ DQG DGMXVW VHWXS SDUDPHWHUV RI 66 DQG KRVW FRQWUROOHU 2SWLRQDO 2 8S WR WKHUPLVWRU RU GU FRQWDFW LQSXWV DQG XS WR GLJLWDO 75 RXWSXWV 2SWLRQDO XPLGLW FFXUDWH RQERDUG KXPLGLW VHQVRU 2SWLRQDO 2FFXSDQF WUHPHO FRPSDFW VHQVRU LGHDO IRU GHWHFWLQJ WKH PRWLRQ RI D SHUVRQ XS WR P IW DZD DUUDQW HDUV HDU IRU KXPLGLW VHQVRU HUWLILFDWLRQ 5 3DUW 66 EDVH PRGHO 60 57 6H...

Page 618: ...orithm tracks the lowest reading over a 7 day interval to slowly correct long term drift away from acceptable fresh air values of between 400 450 ppm CO2 The override and Up Down buttons are monitored by the controller using the same input and same two wires as the temperature sensor in conjunction with the Control BASIC SENSOR ON and SENSOR OFF functions Supply Voltage 5 VDC 20 mA from controller...

Page 619: ...equired Warranty 5 years 1 year for CO2 sensor All models are shipped with onboard thermistor temperature sensor W for white enclosure e g SST W UD J SST OC S Base model with occupancy sensor 20K slider Models SPACE Sensor Temperature Connector Labels SST base model SPACE Sensor Temperature with dedicated 10K thermistor onboard SST CO2 SST CO2 O Base model with CO2 sensor and O momentary contact o...

Page 620: ...UD SST UD J models Comm Jacks for SST J SST O J SST UD J models Power Supply 9 VDC 12 VDC 200 mA min For SST CO2 S SST OC S SST UD OC S models Thermistor Input Power Supply 9 VDC 12 VDC 200 mA min For SST CO2 SST CO2 O SST OC SST UD OC models For SST O L SST O J L models Universal Output Universal Input Thermistor Input Out Out For SST O S L model Universal Output Thermistor Input Thermistor Input...

Page 621: ...F 25o C Type III 10K Ohms 77o F 25o C Type II 3K Ohms 77o F 25o C 1 8K Ohms 77o F 25o C 20K Ohms 77o F 25o C Operating Temperature Range 40 to 302o F 40 to 150o C 0 2o C 0 36o F 0 to 90 RH non condensing Stability 0 13o C 0 23o F Power Dissipation Constant 3 mW o C Interchangeability 0 2o C 0 36o F Accuracy 0 to 70o C Operating Humidity Thermistor Thermistor Attributes z Offer high accuracy and in...

Page 622: ...astic Button Sensor Example A AN D 4 PB 2 200 4 060 2 000 PROBE Ø 0 250 Duct 2 12 4 20 1 62 Immersion Outdoor Air 3 60 5 00 0 85 Plastic Box Galvanized Box Euro Enclosure Standard enclosure defaults AN type III CP type II TEMPERATURE ACCESSORIES INTERFACE DEVICES GAS SENSORS CURRENT PRESSURE RELATIVE HUMIDITY 2305 Pleasant View Road Middleton WI 53562 PH 888 967 5224 www workaci com Immersion unit...

Page 623: ... 50 60 Hz Foot Dual Threaded Hubs Circuit Breaker 3 000 x 2 500 x 3 900 w 500 NPT Hubs 9 5 Typical w 5 Strip 30 to 140 F 100 000 Hours 77 F Split Bobbin 3 70 lbs Class II UL1585 Listed C UL CE RoHS 9 50 50 1 625 2 00 Mounting Hole 350 x 175 3 900 2 400 2 500 3 000 9 50 50 PRIMARYWIRES SECONDARYWIRES Wht 120Vac Blk Comm Yel Wht 24Vac Yel Comm SPECIFICATIONS Secondary Yel Wht wire in phase with Prim...

Page 624: ......

Page 625: ......

Page 626: ......

Page 627: ......

Page 628: ... ǁǁǁ ǁŝůĚƐƚŽŶĞ ĐŽŵ 2 0DLQ 6WUHHW 3K 3HQWLFWRQ D DQDGD 9 ...

Page 629: ...71 www greenheck com Installation Operation Maintenance Manual Water Coils x Chilled Water x Hot Water Steam Coils x Standard Steam x Steam Distribution Non Freeze Refrigerant Coils x Condenser Coils x DX Coils Evaporator x Heat Reclaim Maintenance ...

Page 630: ... the recommendations of the control manufacturer regarding types sizing and locations Face and bypass dampers may also be used but do not close off tightly Air leakage in cooling applications has no appreciable effect In heating applications however the air temperature may rise several degrees and should be considered in system design Low leakage dampers may be required 8 Pipe sizes for the system...

Page 631: ...allow efficient condensate removal from the steam coil especially when using modulating steam control valves to control the leaving air temperature of the coil 7 Do not attempt to lift condensate without the assistance of a condensate pump The pressure required to lift condensate must also be considered for sufficient pressure differential Check valves are also required to prevent reverse flow of ...

Page 632: ...d for series airflow a separate control is required on each bank or coil in the direction of airflow 2 On high pressure installations a two position steam valve with a face and bypass arrangement is preferred where modulating control is required 3 Modulating valves must be sized properly DO NOT OVERSIZE ...

Page 633: ...etween the expansion valve and filter drier The moisture indicator sight glass must be sized to match the size of the liquid line at the thermal expansion valve A liquid line shut off valve with an access port should be sized with the selected liquid line OD and installed close to the condenser The use of other valves tube bends and reducers should be minimized since these items tend to increase p...

Page 634: ...ecklist to verify that all necessary installation procedures have been completed 1 Coils are installed with airflow in same direction as indicated on the coil nameplate or casing 2 Suction connection is at the bottom of the suction header on the evaporator coil suction line is pitched towards compressor and traps are installed in suction risers Suction line is insulated with correct wall thickness...

Page 635: ...LY IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE MANUFACTURER S INSTRUCTIONS FAILURE TO DO SO COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY DEATH OR EQUIPMENT DAMAGE Fin Straightening Coil fins may have been bent during shipping or servicing and should be straightened to maintain maximum heat transfer Reduction of the effective coil surface will correspondingly reduce coil capacity Always check fin appearance after any handling of the...

Page 636: ... ǁǁǁ ǁŝůĚƐƚŽŶĞ ĐŽŵ 2 0DLQ 6WUHHW 3K 3HQWLFWRQ D DQDGD 9 ...

Page 637: ... ǁǁǁ ǁŝůĚƐƚŽŶĞ ĐŽŵ 2 0DLQ 6WUHHW 3K 3HQWLFWRQ D DQDGD 9 ...

Page 638: ......

Page 639: ......

Page 640: ......

Page 641: ......

Page 642: ......

Page 643: ......

Page 644: ......

Page 645: ......

Page 646: ... ǁǁǁ ǁŝůĚƐƚŽŶĞ ĐŽŵ 2 0DLQ 6WUHHW 3K 3HQWLFWRQ D DQDGD 9 ǡ ǡ ...

Page 647: ... 2014 Pentair Equipment Protection PH 763 422 2211 hoffmanonline com 87563688 Rev J P N 64303001 CONCEPT ...

Page 648: ... 2014 Pentair Equipment Protection PH 763 422 2211 hoffmanonline com 87563688 2 9 0x 4x 4x 6 5 4x 8x 1x 2 1 2x 6x 4x 2x 8 3 7 4 3 8 M8X1 25 3 8 1 2 3 8 M6X1 M6X1 8 ...

Page 649: ... 2014 Pentair Equipment Protection PH 763 422 2211 hoffmanonline com 87563688 3 CMFK CMFKSS CMTGFT CMFK CMFKSS CMTGFT ...

Page 650: ... 2014 Pentair Equipment Protection PH 763 422 2211 hoffmanonline com 87563688 4 M5 9 1 2 3 4 ...

Page 651: ... 2014 Pentair Equipment Protection PH 763 422 2211 hoffmanonline com 87563688 5 ...

Page 652: ... 2014 Pentair Equipment Protection PH 763 422 2211 hoffmanonline com 87563688 6 3 2X 22 IN LBS 2 5 Nm 4X 22 IN LBS 2 5 Nm 4X 22 IN LBS 2 5 Nm 2X 22 IN LBS 2 5 Nm ...

Page 653: ... 2014 Pentair Equipment Protection PH 763 422 2211 hoffmanonline com 87563688 7 3 3 7 7 3 3 ...

Page 654: ... 2014 Pentair Equipment Protection PH 763 422 2211 hoffmanonline com 87563688 8 1 2 4X 8X 1X ...

Page 655: ...requerido Utiliser un manchon de conduit ou passe câble inscrit certifié Des passe câbles ou manchons appropriés doivent être utilisés pour fournir le niveau de protection requis DANGER PELIGRO DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH Apply appropriate personal protective equipment PPE and follow safe electrical work practices See NFPA 70E or CSA Z462 This equipment must only be inst...

Page 656: ...serias Si ces directives ne sont pas respectées cela entraînera la mort ou des blessures graves WARNING ADVERTENCIA AVERTISSEMENT FAULT CURRENT DAMAGE The opening of the branch circuit protective device may be an indication that a fault current has been interrupted To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock current carrying parts and other components of this device should be examined and replace...

Page 657: ...e J d une intensité nominale maximale de 30 A Sectionneur de 60 A 50 kA RMS symétriques à 600 Vca maximum quand il est protégé par un fusible temporisé de classe J d une intensité nominale maximale de 100 A Mounting the Enclosure Cómo montar el gabinete Montage du coffret Mount the unit on a secure flat vertical surface The mounting feet are available without removing the cover of the enclosure Mo...

Page 658: ...bo conduit y luego hágalo pasar por el agujero de entrada ya preparado utilizando el cojinete de la tuerca de conexión a tierra dentro del gabinete 3 Sécuriser le manchon sur le conduit puis dans un trou d entrée préparé à l aide de la bague écrou de m à l t à l intérieur du coffret NOTE Do not install conduit entrances above the switch in applications where condensation may be present in conduit ...

Page 659: ... una terminal de tierra sin usar dentro del gabinete Si un conducteur séparé de m à l t de l appareil est utilisé dans le conduit Le conducteur de m à l t doit être raccordé à une borne de m à l t inutilisée à l intérieur du coffret Figure Figura Figure 4 Wiring DIagram Diagrama de alambrado Schéma de câblage Table Tabla Tableau 1 Wire Size and Torque Tamaño de conductor y Par de apriete Calibre d...

Page 660: ... NOTE Be certain that the gaskets are properly seated in the groove NOTA Asegúrese que los empaques estén correctamente colocados en la ranura REMARQUE S assurer que les joints d étanchéité sont bien en place dans la rainure 1 With handle in OFF position replace cover Torque cover screws to 13 lb in 1 5 N m DO NOT OVER TORQUE 1 Con la palanca en la posición de abierto O OFF vuelva a colocar la cub...

Page 661: ... 30 ó 60 A MD3304X y MD3604X Rev 02 07 2014 Sectionneurs de moteur MD sous coffret sans fusibles de 30 ou 60 A MD3304X et MD3604X 2010 2014 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Reservados todos los derechos Tous droits réservés 7 Drilling Template Plantilla de perforación Gabarit de perçage MD3304X Drilling template Plantilla de perforación Gabarit de perçage ...

Page 662: ...tuelles découlant de l utilisation de cette documentation 2010 2014 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 2010 2014 Schneider Electric Reservados todos los derechos 2010 2014 Schneider Electric Tous droits réservés Schneider Electric and Square D are trademarks owned by Schneider Electric Industries SAS or its affiliated companies All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners S...

Page 663: ...o abisagrado y estándar NC Plaques frontales avec garniture NC standard et à charnières Instruction Bulletin Boletín de instrucciones Directives d utilisation 80043 740 01 Retain for Future Use Conservar para uso futuro À conserver pour usage ultérieur ...

Page 664: ...factured by Schneider Electric Safety Precautions DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH Apply appropriate personal protective equipment PPE and follow safe electrical work practices See NFPA 70E This equipment must only be installed and serviced by qualified electrical personnel Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside equipment Always use a properly...

Page 665: ...t See table below G 1 4 20 Spring nut Quantities vary by kit See table below NOTE Contents not shown to scale A B C D E F G Item NC26 NC32 NC38 NC44 NC50 NC56 Type Qty Type Qty Type Qty Type Qty Type Qty Type Qty E S F 4 S F 4 S F 6 S F 6 S F 6 S F 6 S FHR 4 S FHR 4 S FHR 6 S FHR 6 S FHR 6 S FHR 8 F G S FHR 4 S FHR 4 S FHR 4 S FHR 4 S FHR 4 S FHR 4 VS F 8 VS F 8 VS F 8 VS FHR 8 VS FHR 8 VS FHR 8 I...

Page 666: ...for one person to install Additional assistance may be required 1 Place the support bracket located at the bottom of the trim front on the enclosure lip as shown Support bracket 2 Open the trim front door Align the screw holes in the trim front door recesses with the screw holes in the panelboard deadfront and fasten with the 10 32 x 19 32 in self threading screws included in the kit NOTE For flus...

Page 667: ...talling Low Amp Hinged Trim 02 2009 ENGLISH Installing Low Amp Hinged Trim 1Install the spring nuts on the enclosure lip over the holes corresponding to the screw holes in the trim front 2 Place the support bracket located at the bottom of the trim front on the enclosure lip as shown Support bracket ...

Page 668: ...fasten with the 1 4 20 x 1 in screws included in the kit 4 Open the trim front door Align the screw holes in the trim front door recesses with the screw holes in the panelboard deadfront and fasten with the 10 32 x 19 32 in self threading screws included in the kit NOTE For flush mounted applications elevate the interior to the proper position Refer to the information manual provided with the pane...

Page 669: ...GLISH Installing High Amp Standard or Hinged Trim 1Install the spring nuts on the enclosure lip over the holes corresponding to the screw holes in the trim front 2 Place the support bracket located at the bottom of the trim front on the enclosure lip as shown NOTE Standard trim pictured Hinged trim support bracket pictured on page 4 Support bracket ...

Page 670: ...Hinged Trim ENGLISH 3 Align screw holes in the trim front with the spring nuts on the enclosure lip and fasten with the 1 4 20 x 1 in self threading screws included in the kit NOTE For flush mounted applications elevate the interior to the proper position Refer to the information manual provided with the panelboard for more information ...

Page 671: ...f this material Schneider Electric USA 252 North Tippecanoe Peru IN 46970 USA 1 888 SquareD 1 888 778 2733 www us SquareD com Square D is a trademark or registered trademark of Schneider Electric Other trademarks used herein are the property of their respective owners 2009 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 8 ENGLISH NC Standard and Hinged Trim Fronts 80043 740 01 Instruction Bulletin 02 2009 ...

Page 672: ... ǁǁǁ ǁŝůĚƐƚŽŶĞ ĐŽŵ 2 0DLQ 6WUHHW 3K 3HQWLFWRQ D DQDGD 9 ...

Page 673: ...Model 6 Motor Control Centers Class 8998 Instruction Bulletin 80459 641 01E 10 2012 Retain for future use ENGLISH ...

Page 674: ...procedure Please Note Electrical equipment should be installed operated serviced and maintained only by qualified personnel No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising out of the use of this material Systems Integration Disclaimer Unless systems integration is performed by Schneider Electric Schneider Electric claims no liability for any systems integration work...

Page 675: ...ype 12 Enclosures 28 Splicing With No P Gasketing 29 Splicing With P Gasketing 29 Splice to Existing Left 29 Splice to Existing Right 29 Joining New Style NEMA Type 3R Enclosures to Old Style NEMA Type 3R Enclosures 30 Joining to the Left Side of an Existing NEMA Type 3R MCC Enclosure 30 Joining to the Right Side of an Existing NEMA Type 3R MCC Enclosure 33 Joining NEMA Type 3R Sections 34 Splicin...

Page 676: ...ector Settings 73 Adjusting Mag Gard or PowerPact Magnetic Trip Setting 73 Section 9 iMCC 75 iMCC Overview 75 Networks Communications Overview 75 Connecting the iMCC Cabling System 76 Network Cabling 76 Cables Between Shipping Splits 76 Load Cables 76 Communication Networks 76 Bridges Repeaters 76 Terminating Resistors 76 Direct Cable Connection 76 Operation 80 Pre operation Checklists 80 MCC Stru...

Page 677: ...aintenance Log 112 Appendix A Removal and Installation of Horizontal Bus Barrier Panels 113 Removal 113 Installation 114 Fixed Barrier 115 Removal 115 Installation 116 Appendix B Non Conductive Horizontal Bus Barrier Retrofit Kit 117 Remove Existing Components 118 Horizontal Wireway Cover 118 Horizontal Bus Barriers 118 Units Below the Topshelf 118 Existing Brackets 15 in 381 mm Deep MCC Only 118 ...

Page 678: ...0 Figure 20 Removing the Insulating Barrier 31 Figure 21 Installing the Deflector Bracket 31 Figure 22 Re attaching the Back Plates 32 Figure 23 Installing the Splice Deflector 33 Figure 24 Remove Mid and End Deflector Caps from the Top of the MCC 34 Figure 25 Attach the Multi section Bracket 34 Figure 26 Secure the Vertical Channels 34 Figure 27 Replace Lifting Angle Hardware 34 Figure 28 Horizon...

Page 679: ...73 Loosening Captive Fasteners 57 Figure 74 Arc Rated MCC Door Latches 57 Figure 75 Releasing the Lock in Device when supplied 58 Figure 76 Disconnected Terminal Blocks 58 Figure 77 Power Leads and Top of Terminal Blocks Fed Through Wiring Port 58 Figure 78 Pulling the Twin Handle Cam Mechanism Forward 58 Figure 79 Operating the Mechanism to Structure Interlock 59 Figure 80 Locked Out Device 59 Fi...

Page 680: ...8 Figure 126 Fuse Bases 98 Figure 127 Reinstalling the Compac 6 Control Unit 99 Figure 128 Circuit Breaker Replacement 111 Figure 129 Aligning the Arrows on the Panels 113 Figure 130 Right Panel Side View 114 Figure 131 Installing the Right Panel into the Rear Groove 114 Figure 132 Fixed Horizontal Bus Barrier 115 Figure 133 Horizontal Bus Barrier Installation and Removal 116 Figure 134 Barrier In...

Page 681: ...ers 51 Table 6 Bus Connection Torque Values 55 Table 7 Bus Connection Torque Values 68 Table 8 Lug Types and Wire Sizes 71 Table 9 Pin Outs for iMCC Networks 76 Table 10 Network Connection Pin Outs 76 Table 11 Local Error Display 83 Table 12 Command Line Codes 83 Table 13 Motor Logic Plus Address Descriptions 84 Table 14 Read Only Registers 85 Table 15 Read Write Registers 86 Table 16 Shelf Instal...

Page 682: ...representative for more information on Model 6 MCC arc flash options A Model 6 MCC with the arc rated option includes a label Figure 1 which states the performance and requirements necessary to maintain the rating The arc containment rating is applicable to the front sides and rear of the MCC defined as Type 2 in ANSI C37 20 7 This instruction bulletin contains specific instructions on maintaining...

Page 683: ...ic 1200 2500 A PowerPact R frame circuit breakers equipped with MicroLogic trip units manufactured by Schneider Electric 800 1200 A Masterpact NT circuit breakers equipped with Micrologic trip units manufactured by Schneider Electric 1600 2500 A Masterpact NW circuit breakers equipped with Micrologic trip units manufactured by Schneider Electric 7 Approved fuses that can be used as the upstream OC...

Page 684: ... 840USE11600 Quantum NOE 771 X0 Ethernet Modules User Guide PI MBUS 300 Modicon Modbus Protocol Reference Guide 870USE00200 TSX Momentum I 0 Base User Guide 30072 013 98 Motor Logic Plus Programmable Solid State Overload Relay 870USE10100 Modicon TSX Momentum M1 Processor Adapter and Option Adapter User Manual 30072 013 99 Solutions Software for Motor Logic Plus SSOL 870USE11400 Ethernet Communica...

Page 685: ...e national and local electrical codes Perform such work only after reading and understanding all of the instructions contained in this bulletin Follow all safety procedures defined in NFPA 70E CSA Z462 and OSHA 1910 331 35 as well as those established by your specific location Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside equipment Assume that all circuits are live until ...

Page 686: ...d together at the job site with the use of captive horizontal splice bars Before shipment from the factory the MCC is inspected visually electrically and mechanically by professional quality control analysts Certification of quality control testing is available upon request After leaving Quality Control each shipping block is carefully packaged and attached to a skid see Figure 2 or Figure 3 Figur...

Page 687: ...ht Fork trucks when available provide a convenient method of moving MCCs see Figure 4 on page 16 When removing an MCC from a shipping pallet carefully balance and secure it using a safety strap NOTE Standard sections are packaged and shipped in a sideways position as shown in Figure 2 on page 14 and Figure 4 on page 16 Extra heavy sections such as 18 pulse drives are packaged and shipped in an upr...

Page 688: ... place its lifting angle s may be removed and discarded To prevent the entrance of foreign materials replace all hardware that secured the lifting angle s Model 6 MCCs with the arc rated option must have the lifting angle removed to maintain the arc rating and allow the proper operation of the arc rated vent flaps Retain the hardware from the lifting angle for installing the top plate assembly shi...

Page 689: ... Storing the MCC If the MCC cannot be placed into service upon receipt store it in a clean dry ventilated building free from temperature extremes Acceptable storage temperatures are from 0 C 32 F to 40 C 104 F Acceptable humidity levels are 0 95 non condensing If the storage area is cool and or damp provide enough heat to prevent condensation inside the MCC Contact your Schneider Electric field sa...

Page 690: ...national installation codes Provide at least 0 5 in 13 mm of space between the back of front of board MCCs and a wall For damp locations provide at least 6 in 152 mm When selecting a location for the installation of an MCC carefully consider accessibility overhead clearances and future expansions Considering these factors will eliminate many difficulties during this and future MCC installations NO...

Page 691: ...t of shipping blocks units and doors The surface under an MCC must be of a non combustible material unless bottom plates are installed in each vertical section DANGER BURN HAZARD FROM HOT GASES Apply appropriate personal protective equipment PPE and follow safe electrical work practices See NFPA 70E or CSA Z462 Keep the area directly above the equipment clear and unobstructed for a distance of 28 ...

Page 692: ...CC To mount and splice a new MCC section to an existing Model 6 section or to join factory shipping splits follow these steps 1 Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside the equipment and follow lockout tagout procedures Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm the power is off 2 Remove the upper and lower horizontal wire trough covers in all sect...

Page 693: ...off 2 The hardware kit for joining sections see Figure 10 is bagged and tied to the right front corner channel of each shipping split 3 Locate the four half circle shaped notches on the inside surface of the corner channels see Figure 11A 4 Using four of the 3 4 in x 1 4 20 hex head thread forming screws supplied in the hardware kit join the front vertical corner channels by inserting the screws t...

Page 694: ...wo of the four 1 1 4 in x 1 4 20 hex head thread forming screws supplied in the hardware kit to join the bottom section side channels The screw installed at the front is installed from the right hand section see Figure 11D 3 The screw installed at the rear is installed from the left hand section see Figure 11E Figure 11 Bolting Sections Together 11A 11B 11C Half circle shaped notch 11D Front Botto...

Page 695: ...5 for Seismic Applications Fasten each section to the floor see Figure 12 using 1 2 in or 3 4 in grade 5 or higher bolts and flat washers furnished by customer 0 88 in 22 mm diameter base channel mounting holes provide clearance for bolt expansion anchors for 1 2 in bolts NOTE Although sections are free standing floor fastening prevents movement thereby preventing conduit connection damage Figure ...

Page 696: ... established the BSSC in1979 to develop and promote regulatory provisions for earthquake risk mitigation at the national level Incoming and outgoing cable and conduit must also be considered as related but independent systems They must be designed and restrained to withstand the forces generated by the seismic event without increasing the load transferred to the equipment For applications where se...

Page 697: ...E E 15 in 381 mm Section Dimensions Letter Section Width Dimension A N A 5 00 in 127 mm B N A 15 00 in 381 mm C 20 00 in 508 mm 10 00 in 254 mm 25 00 in 635 mm 15 00 in 381 mm 30 00 in 762 mm 20 00 in 508 mm 35 00 in 889 mm 25 00 in 635 mm D N A 9 98 in 253 mm E N A 2 50 in 64 mm N A Not applicable 20 in 508 mm Section Dimensions Letter Section Width Dimension A N A 5 00 in 127 mm B N A 20 00 in 5...

Page 698: ...00 in 635 mm D N A 9 98 in 253 mm E N A 11 60 in 295 mm F N A 12 50 in 318 mm G N A 5 00 in 127 mm H N A 3 60 in 91 mm N A Not applicable 20 in 508 mm Section Dimensions Letter Section Width Dimension A N A 5 00 in 127 mm B N A 20 00 in 508 mm C 20 00 in 508 mm 10 00 in 254 mm 25 00 in 635 mm 15 00 in 381 mm 30 00 in 762 mm 20 00 in 508 mm 35 00 in 889 mm 25 00 in 635 mm D N A 14 98 in 380 mm E N ...

Page 699: ...ic hazard for site specific locations as defined by the current edition of the International Building Code or NFPA 5000 or relevant local building code or consulting engineer of record DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH Turn off power supplying equipment before installing lateral bracing Bolts must not penetrate top plate by more than 0 50 in Failure to follow this instruction ...

Page 700: ...onal protective equipment PPE and follow safe electrical work practices See NFPA 70E or CSA Z462 This equipment must only be installed and serviced by qualified electrical personnel Turn off all power supplying the equipment before working on or inside equipment Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm power is off Replace all devices doors and covers before turning on power t...

Page 701: ...e instructions Splice to Existing Right Splice to Existing Left 1 Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside the equipment and follow lockout tagout procedures Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm the power is off 2 Remove the end plate and all flat gaskets from the existing MCC Leave the P gasket on the existing front corner channel in place 3...

Page 702: ...or if supplied from the rightmost section of the MCC being added Discard both end deflectors Retain the hardware for installation of new parts 3 Remove the back plate from the leftmost section of the existing MCC and also from the rightmost section of the MCC being added Retain the back plates and mounting hardware for re installation 4 Remove the end plate see Figure 19 from the leftmost section ...

Page 703: ... of the MCC being added using six 1 4 20 screws contained in the kit Ensure that the short flange is flush with the front of the corner channel and that the holes in the bracket line up with the holes in the corner channel 8 Install a left splice bracket see Figure 21 on page 31 90 in 2286 mm long to the rear corner channel of the rightmost section of the MCC being added using six 1 4 20 screws co...

Page 704: ... the existing MCC Discard the splice bars Install the horizontal bus splice assembly provided in this kit using the instructions beginning on 35 of this bulletin Use the remaining six 1 4 20 hex head screws provided in the kit to splice the corner channels of the existing MCC to the right splice brackets installed in Steps 9 and 10 13 Using the 10 32 hex head screws removed in Step 3 re attach the...

Page 705: ...e left splice bracket installed in Step 6 using six 10 32 flat Phillips head screws provided in the kit Ensure that the short flange of the right splice bracket is in front of the flange of the left splice bracket When properly installed the left splice bracket will extend approximately 1 in 25 mm below the right splice bracket 8 Position the structures that are to be spliced together Make sure th...

Page 706: ...he end closing plate from the right side of the existing section 5 After placing the structures side by side join them as described in Joining NEMA Type 1 NEMA Type 1 Gasketed NEMA Type 12 Sections on page 20 6 Re attach the back plate removed in Step 2 to the right section using the additional hardware supplied Attach the right side to the multi section bracket see Figure 25 7 Install the mid def...

Page 707: ...rs see Figure 28 See Appendix A Removal and Installation of Horizontal Bus Barrier Panels for the steps for removing horizontal bus barriers DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH Apply appropriate personal protective equipment PPE and follow safe electrical work practices See NFPA 70E or CSA Z462 This equipment must only be installed and serviced by qualified electrical personnel ...

Page 708: ...a single bar per phase and does not use a fork type bus see Figure 29 DO NOT use the single bar per phase splice on the fork end of the fork type bus see Figure 30 for incorrect application Two splice bars must be used on the fork end of the fork type bus see instructions beginning on page 38 Contact your local Schneider Electric representative if the necessary two bar splice is not provided with ...

Page 709: ...rs are reinstalled with the concave side facing the horizontal bus see Figure 34 4 Torque all bolts on both ends to 31 32 lb ft 41 87 43 22 N m See Figure 35 5 Return to Step 2 on page 35 for all phases and for the neutral bus if supplied When all splices are complete go to Step 6 6 Before energizing the equipment slide the horizontal bus barriers into the closed position and replace all covers Fi...

Page 710: ...ts 1 Remove the two left bolts Loosen but do not remove the two right bolts on the splice assembly see Figure 36 NOTE Do not remove the two right bolts from the splice assemblies Doing so will permit spacers to fall from the splice assembly If this occurs re assemble the splice bars and spacers if applicable in the proper order before continuing 2 Slide the splice assembly to the left until the tw...

Page 711: ...e facing the splice bus see Figure 39 4 Torque all bolts on both ends to 31 32 lb ft 41 87 43 22 N m see Figure 40 5 Return to Step 2 on page 35 for all phases and for the neutral bus if supplied When all splices are complete go to Step 6 6 Before energizing the equipment slide the horizontal bus barriers into the closed position and replace all covers Figure 38 Inserting the Splice Bolts Figure 3...

Page 712: ...nks is one greater than the number of horizontal bus bars This creates a sandwich splice The rear most splice link contains the captive nuts 3 Remove the two left bolts from each splice assembly Then loosen but do not remove the two right bolts of each splice assembly see Figure 42 If the bus has optional 85 000 A bus bracing supplied see Figure 43 also loosen the center nut of each splice assembl...

Page 713: ...d into the horizontal bus see Figure 38 on page 39 Make sure the original conical washers are re installed with the concave side facing the splice bus see Figure 46 6 Torque the bolts to 31 32 lb ft 41 87 43 22 N m See Figure 47 7 Repeat Steps 2 6 for all phases and the neutral bus if supplied 8 Before energizing the equipment replace all covers and barriers Figure 44 Slide the Splice Assembly to ...

Page 714: ...e integral splice assembly unless the section is equipped with offset bus Figure 48 Ground Splice Bar as Shipped DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH Apply appropriate personal protective equipment PPE and follow safe electrical work practices See NFPA 70E or CSA Z462 This equipment must only be installed and serviced by qualified electrical personnel Turn off all power supplying...

Page 715: ...er of bus links is one greater than the number of horizontal bus bars This creates a sandwich splice The rear most splice link contains the captive nuts 3 Remove all four bolts from each splice assembly see Figure 51 4 Slide the splice assembly to the left until the two left holes are in line with the corresponding holes in the horizontal bus on the left section see Figure 52 5 Reinstall all four ...

Page 716: ...lice is not on the left remove the kit before energizing and retain it for future expansion If a structure is to be spliced to another structure on the right follow splicing instructions provided for that structure application All splice connections have one more splice bar than the number of horizontal bus bars The rear most splice bar contains captive nuts Figure 55 Torque All Bolts DANGER HAZAR...

Page 717: ...87 43 22 N m see Figure 56 If the optional 85 000 A bus bracing is supplied torque the center nut to 70 lb ft 94 92 N m 7 Repeat Steps 2 6 for each of the three horizontal bus phases 8 Before energizing the equipment replace all covers and barriers Conductor Entry Conduit entry space is provided at the top and bottom of the MCC structure The top plates and closing plates in bottom if present are r...

Page 718: ...ngle see Figure 57 DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH Apply appropriate personal protective equipment PPE and follow safe electrical work practices See NFPA 70E or CSA Z462 This equipment must only be installed and serviced by qualified electrical personnel Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside equipment Always use a properly rated voltage sens...

Page 719: ...the cabinet see Figure 58 4 Once the vent hood is removed secure the top closing plate by reinstalling the 10 32 screws removed in Step 3 see Figure 58 5 Position the vent hood on the top of the cabinet as shown 6 Secure the vent hood in place using the two 3 8 in 9 525 mm bolts and washers removed in Step 2 Torque the bolts to 28 33 lb in 3 164 3 729 N m Figure 58 Reposition and Attach the Vent H...

Page 720: ...two 3 8 in 9 525 mm bolts and washers that were removed in Step 2 Place them through the pull box lower side channels and into the top of the cabinet Torque the bolts to 28 33 lb in 3 164 3 729 N m 7 Re install the pull box front panel removed in Step 5 and the top closing plate removed in Step 4 see Figure 60 DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH Apply appropriate personal protec...

Page 721: ...the vertical wire trough When supplied grommeted wire ports must be opened to route wire to the unit The H shaped cut pattern is pre scored for easy opening Using a small knife cut through the center tabs and complete the H shaped slice see Figure 62 When cutting be sure not to damage the wires located near the grommet Pull apart control terminals see Figure 63 are mounted on a 35 mm DIN rail loca...

Page 722: ...ired 8 Using the lug pad nuts and washers item attach the crimp lug cable assembly item to the loom bolts on the lug pad 9 Torque the lug pad nuts to 820 840 lb in 93 95 N m DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH Apply appropriate personal protective equipment PPE and follow safe electrical work practices See NFPA 70E or CSA Z462 This equipment must only be installed and serviced b...

Page 723: ... Compartment Torque Connection Table 4 Connection Torque Values for Main Lug Compartments 1 1 See Figure 66 Socket Size Across Flat Torque 3 8 in 375 lb in 42 4 N m 1 2 in 500 lb in 55 6 N m for 800 1200 A bottom main lug compartments 600 lb in 67 8 N m for all others Table 5 Connection Torque Values for Main and Branch Feeders Frame Size Ampere Rating Torque H 15 30 A 35 150 A 50 lb in 5 6 N m 12...

Page 724: ...NOTE For Form II Class C fuse spacing contact your Schneider Canada representative DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH Apply appropriate personal protective equipment PPE and follow safe electrical work practices See NFPA 70E or CSA Z462 This equipment must only be installed and serviced by qualified electrical personnel Never operate energized switch with door open Turn off swi...

Page 725: ...cuit breakers and other operator mechanisms to ensure that they are properly aligned and operate freely Electrically exercise all electrically operated switches circuit breakers and other mechanisms but not under load to ensure that the devices operate properly An auxiliary source of control power may be required Verify proper interval and contact operation of the timers Verify that proper overloa...

Page 726: ...ed turn on the devices with a firm positive motion 6 After all disconnect devices are closed loads such as lighting circuits starters contactors heaters and motors may be energized DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH Apply appropriate personal protective equipment PPE and follow safe electrical work practices See NFPA 70E or CSA Z462 This equipment must only be installed and ser...

Page 727: ...moving the two piece bus barrier in each section 4 Examine all bus bars and connectors Replace any parts that are badly discolored corroded or pitted Also replace parts subjected to excessive temperatures 5 Verify that all bolts at the bus connection points indicated by a hexagon in Figure 69 are in place and properly tightened Although one specific type of compartment or bus is shown in Figure 69...

Page 728: ...connections that have become loose during shipment and handling using the following procedures If the control unit see Figure 71 is being removed from the MCC for maintenance start with Removing the Control Unit beginning on page 57 If maintenance is performed with the control unit installed start with Circuit Breaker or Disconnect Switch on page 63 Figure 70 Main Lug Compartment Torque Connection...

Page 729: ... of the unit when supplied by turning the screw on the front of the device until the locking pawl is parallel to the bottom of the unit see Figure 75 Figure 72 Operator Mechanism in the OFF Position DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH Apply appropriate personal protective equipment PPE and follow safe electrical work practices See NFPA 70E or CSA Z462 This equipment must only be...

Page 730: ... the top portion of the control pull apart terminal blocks through the wiring port and into the vertical wire trough see Figure 77 7 Pull forward on the twin handle cam mechanism located at the top front of the unit to rack the unit partially out of the structure see Figure 78 This action disconnects the power stabs from the vertical bus Continue pulling forward until the handles are fully extende...

Page 731: ...e Figure 81 In units with a full bottom plate additional accessibility to the components and wiring can be achieved by folding the bottom plate down To do so lean the unit on its back remove the two front screws and fold the bottom plate down see Figure 82 NOTE Lifting plug on units taller than 24 in 610 mm requires two or more persons using special handling precautions If lifting devices are used...

Page 732: ...refer to Compac 6 Units beginning on page 97 or the information included with the shipment of the new device 1 Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside the equipment and follow lockout tagout procedures Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm power is off 2 Move the operator handle to the OFF position see Figure 84 on page 61 Figure 83 Driving O...

Page 733: ...trol station plate follow these steps a Loosen the captive mounting screws holding the plate to the front of the unit b Remove the plate from the unit see Figure 86 c Re attach the plate after disconnecting the load wires and control terminal block NOTE Do not disconnect the wires to the control station plate 5 Disconnect the power wiring from the starter terminals Tag the terminations for re inst...

Page 734: ...s to various electrical connections for servicing Tests and Maintenance Performed with the Control Unit Removed Once the control unit is removed perform the following tests and maintenance Stab Assemblies Inspect the stab assemblies see Figure 88 for signs of arcing or overheating Replace the disconnect assembly FA KA type circuit breakers or the jaw connector assembly H or J frame circuit breaker...

Page 735: ...anism see Figure 89 Test for proper ON TRIP OFF and RESET positions F K and L frame circuit breakers or ON TRIP and OFF positions H J M or P frame circuit breakers Verify proper door interlock operation NOTE Fusible switch operator mechanisms do not have TRIP or RESET positions Fuses Inspect all fuses and fuse clips see Figure 90 Replace any parts showing signs of overheating or arcing Starter Con...

Page 736: ...r size for the application Refer to the thermal unit selection tables on the inside of the vertical wire trough doors Wiring and Electrical Connections Verify that all electrical connections are correct tighten them if necessary see Figure 94 Also inspect all power and control wiring replacing any wire that has worn insulation or shows signs of overheating or cracking Starter Interlocks Check the ...

Page 737: ...e steps below 1 Reinstall all units by reversing Steps 1 12 in Removing the Control Unit beginning on page 57 2 Confirm the cam mechanism is in the open position position the mounting slides of the control unit onto the slots of the mid shelf Slide the unit inward to engage the cam mechanism For Compac 6 units position the mounting slides of the control unit onto the slots of the mid shelf Slide t...

Page 738: ...ween phases or between phases and neutral for example control transformers Although readings may be slightly different observe the one megohm lower limit during start up DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH Apply appropriate personal protective equipment PPE and follow safe electrical work practices See NFPA 70E or CSA Z462 This equipment must only be installed and serviced by qu...

Page 739: ...ng the equipment into service again Make sure all replacement parts are rated properly and are suitable for the application If in doubt consult your Schneider Electric field sales representative After any fault perform all maintenance procedures starting on page 55 and continuing to Insulation Test beginning on page 66 Also perform the following procedures after a fault 1 If the fault occurred dow...

Page 740: ...horized personnel may operate an interlock defeat mechanism see Figure 97 c Inspect the motor starters for damage Replace contacts and contact springs if the contacts are welded or show heat damage If deterioration extends beyond the contacts replace the entire contactor or starter d Replace the complete overload relay if the thermal units are burned out or if any indications of arcing or burning ...

Page 741: ...owing describes 600 V rated MCC starter units equipped with the Motor Logic solid state overload relay Read and understand the safety precautions at the beginning of this bulletin before you install adjust or perform maintenance on these units For full details about MCC installation refer to Section 4 Installing the MCC on page 18 Figure 98 Motor Logic SSOLR Figure 99 NEMA Rated Compac 6 Unit Figu...

Page 742: ...field sales representative for assistance Schneider Electric assumes no responsibility for the design or implementation of retrofits unless contracted to perform them Use copper wire only on device power and control terminals Conductors must be sized for 60 C or 75 C National Electrical Code NEC ratings Pressure wire terminals are suitable for wire sizes 16 12 AWG solid or stranded Terminal instru...

Page 743: ...CT window and return via the windows provided between the baseplate and overload see Figure 102 The final pass terminates on the load side of the contactor MCC units requiring multiple passes are factory supplied prelooped with 14 AWG wire and interposing terminal blocks Refer to Motor Logic Retrofit Applications on page 70 for information concerning retrofit Table 8 Lug Types and Wire Sizes Class...

Page 744: ...lt the motor manufacturers for current capacity NOTE For part winding and multi speed applications use the MFLC of each motor winding as a basis for overload adjustment Trip and alarm contact ratings NEMA A600 and NEMA P300 SOLID STATE OVERLOAD RELAY CURRENT RANGE SIZE 00C 3 9A 1 5 4 5A 2 PASSES 1 3A 3 PASSES SIZE 0 SIZE 1 SIZE 2 SIZE 3 SIZE 4 6 18A 9 27A 15 45A 30 90A 45 135A 3 9A 2 PASSES 4 5 13...

Page 745: ...48940 260 01 shipped with the equipment To access the Mag Gard trip adjustment dial 1 Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside the equipment and follow lockout tagout procedures Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm the power is off 2 Place the unit handle in the OFF position and open the door 3 While pushing the door interlock lever forward t...

Page 746: ...ng by adjusting the switch labeled Isd as shown in Figure 106 The dial is labeled in amperes Refer to instruction bulletin 48940 310 01 Micrologic 0 1 2 and 3 Trip Units User Guide for more information on trip settings This instruction bulletin is shipped with the equipment After obtaining the motor full load current from the motor nameplate select an adjustable trip set point to test start the mo...

Page 747: ...ctly to every unit of the iMCC for an effective method of connecting centralized control to widely distributed I O Networking allows for easy monitoring of critical data of each motor or load connected to the iMCC enabling precise process control at all times With this information your staff can respond to potential problems proactively Real time access to information and records of last faults al...

Page 748: ...ng and all other cabling Communication Networks There are three primary ways to connect communication networks via bridges repeaters programmable logic controllers PLCs or a direct cable connection Follow the applicable instructions below to make the cabling connections for your Model 6 iMCC Bridges Repeaters If the PLC is not in the local area of the MCC you will typically need to use a bridge re...

Page 749: ... cables 5000129 75 20 in 508 mm extension optional 5000129 76 Male terminator 5000129 186 ATS48 cable 5000129 75 NOTE Shield must be grounded at one end only Orderable Item Part Number Cap for unused male end or tap 3463512 1 Cap for unused female end or tap 3463512 3 Mini female field attachable connector 5000129 287 Mini male field attachable connector 5000129 292 20 in 508 mm trunk extension 50...

Page 750: ...k cable assembly 80420 915 50 Female terminator DN150 Device cable 80420 916 01 20 in 508 mm trunk cable 80420 918 01 Male terminator DN100 Male cap D970CAPR Mini minitee DN3020 NOTE Shield must be grounded at one end only Orderable Item Part Number Mini female field attachable connector 1A5000 34DN Mini male field attachable connector 1A5006 34DN 25 in 635 mm trunk cable 80420 919 01 30 in 762 mm...

Page 751: ... cable 5000129 75 20 in 508 mm extension optional 5000129 76 ATS48 cable 5000129 75 Grounding tee 5000129 230 NOTE Shield must be grounded in all sections Orderable Item Part Number Cap for unused male end or tap 3463512 1 Cap for unused female end or tap 3463512 3 20 in 508 mm trunk extension 5000129 76 25 in 635 mm trunk extension 5000129 78 30 in 762 mm trunk extension 5000129 79 35 in 889 mm t...

Page 752: ...zing Remove all blocks or other temporary holding means from the electrical devices Remove any secondary shunt bars from the current transformers Do not operate a current transformer with its secondary shunt bars open circuited Manually exercise all switches circuit breakers and other operator mechanisms to ensure that they are properly aligned and operate freely Electrically exercise all electric...

Page 753: ...oors and covers are closed before energizing the equipment 4 Energize the equipment in sequence starting with the main devices the feeder devices next and then the motor starter devices 5 With all barriers in place and all unit doors closed and latched turn on the devices with a firm positive motion 6 After all disconnect devices are closed you may energize loads such as lighting circuits starters...

Page 754: ...ess and hold the Reset Program button NOTE The display will not illuminate for local programming if the Mode Select switch is in the Run position DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH Apply appropriate personal protective equipment PPE and follow safe electrical work practices See NFPA 70E or CSA Z462 Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside the Moto...

Page 755: ...5H to the command register 3 Program the appropriate parameter See Table 13 on page 84 for a register map with a list of parameters For more detailed information refer to bulletin 30072 013 102_ See Table 14 on page 85 and Table 15 on page 86 to determine the location and addressing of parameters within the Motor Logic Plus register map 4 Restart the overload by using code 01H Table 11 Local Error...

Page 756: ...ltiplied by scale factor C0 1Bo RD1 Remaining restart delay RD1 C2 1B1 RD2 Remaining restart delay RD2 C4 1B2 RD3 Remaining restart delay RD3 C6 1B3 COMLINE Command line code address C6H see Table 12 write only C8 1B4 Scale PowerLogic scale parameter read only 0 1 2 16 bit signed word 2 s complement read only CA 1B5 LV Low voltage threshold 170 V to HV 600 V model 450 V to HV CC 1B6 HV High voltag...

Page 757: ...B0 1A8 FH NIBBLE_CODED 4 fault history The four fault history is based on the following scheme 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 where bits 1 4 Last fault bits 5 8 2nd last fault bits 9 12 3rd last fault and bits 13 16 4th last fault These four bits indicate a hex value that corresponds to the following faults 01 High voltage 02 Low voltage 03 N A 04 Contactor failure 05 Phase reversal 06 Sin...

Page 758: ... Max Off 0 8 x OC Min D6 1BB CUB Current unbalance threshold 2 25 or 999 6 D8 1BC TC Overcurrent trip class 5 J5 10 J10 15 J15 20 J20 30 J30 J Jam protection is enabled 5 5 decimal J5 133 decimal 10 10 decimal J10 138 decimal 15 15 decimal J15 143 decimal 20 20 decimal J20 148 decimal 30 30 decimal J30 158 decimal DA 1BD RD1 Rapid cycle timer 2 500 seconds 10 DC 1BE RD2 Restart delay all faults ex...

Page 759: ...equipped with the TeSys T Motor Management Controller Read and understand the safety precautions at the beginning of this bulletin before you install adjust or perform maintenance on these units For full details about MCC installation refer to Section 4 Installing the MCC on page 18 Figure 112 TeSys T Controllers Modbus DeviceNet PROFIBUS Ethernet CANopen Figure 113 NEMA Rated Control Unit TeSys T...

Page 760: ...ated adjacent to the terminal block or on the wireway door Applications Requiring Turns There are some applications that require more than one wiring turn through the TeSys T controller All NEMA Size 4 applications require three passes through separately mounted current transformers CTs rated 300 5 Certain two speed constant or variable torque applications require two passes through the TeSys T co...

Page 761: ...r as a unit mounted option or as a separate handheld programming kit containing one HMI and one 3 3 ft 1 m connection cable 1 Connect the HMI to the TeSys T unit If supplied as a unit mounted option the connection will be made at the factory or Connect the programming kit directly to the LTME or HMI port on the front of theTesys T controller or Connect the programming kit via the optional unit mou...

Page 762: ...gramming for the Power Meter Series 800 are contained in Schneider Electric instruction bulletins 63230 500 200 and 63230 500 224 see the iMCC Related Literature table on 12 PowerLogic Circuit Monitor Instructions for performing local and remote programming for the Circuit Monitor 3000 or Circuit Monitor 4000 series are contained in Schneider Electric instruction bulletin 63230 400 204 or 63230 30...

Page 763: ...h Micrologic Trip Units User Guide Device Addressing Unless specified otherwise MCC devices are assigned addresses starting from 2 Software Configurable software such as PowerLogic System Manager Software PowerSuite or Motor Logic Plus Solutions is available for communication with your intelligent Model 6 iMCC components For setup operating and maintenance instructions consult the user manual incl...

Page 764: ...ormation Type of equipment being supplied Supply voltage frequency system type NEMA EEMAC enclosure type Enclosure finish Control circuit voltage and frequency Optional control circuit components required control transformers push buttons pilot lights selector switches etc Special features The factory order number of the original MCC the number is stamped into the structure nameplate on the vertic...

Page 765: ...roperly rated voltage sensing device to confirm the power is off 2 Remove the MCC unit from the structure See the procedure for Maintaining the Control Unit on page 56 of this manual 3 Perform the required modifications Use thread forming screws to mount devices Do not use bolts and nuts as they could loosen over time and cause property damage or personal injury The hardware must not extend beyond...

Page 766: ... devices Do not use bolts and nuts as they could loosen over time and cause property damage or personal injury The hardware must not extend beyond the back of the MCC unit saddle more than 0 25 in 6 mm or beyond the sides and bottom pan by more than 0 125 in 3 mm 4 Make sure that proper electrical spacing1 between uninsulated live parts of opposite polarity and an exposed or uninsulated dead metal...

Page 767: ...7 50 see Figure 116 on page 95 This midshelf includes arc pressure relief flaps and must be used when installing arc rated MCC units to maintain the arc containment ratings Figure 115 Shelf and Door Installation Table 16 Shelf Installation Kit Parts Description Qty Assemble per Item Shelf 2 Steps 2 and 3 A Flat head screws 4 Step 3 D Unit door 1 Step 4 F Hex head screws 4 Steps 4 and 5 H Quarter t...

Page 768: ...cate the vertical wire trough grommet see Figure 117 nearest the bottom of the control unit Cut the grommet following the instructions on the grommet See the second paragraph under Load and Control Wiring on page 49 7 Remove the manual bus shutter s see Figure 118 to allow insertion of the new control unit slide out the top bus shutter NOTE Do not remove the tether 8 Confirm the cam mechanism is i...

Page 769: ...through the grommet and connect them to the terminals of the top removable portion of the control pull apart terminal blocks see Figure 123 13 Close the unit door and secure the fasteners Compac 6 Units The following describes how to add a Compac 6 six inch 52 mm unit to an MCC section Before installing these units read and understand the safety precautions at the beginning of this section For ful...

Page 770: ...ractices See NFPA 70E or CSA Z462 This equipment must only be installed and serviced by qualified electrical personnel Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside equipment Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm power is off Replace all devices doors and covers before turning on power to this equipment Failure to follow this instruction will resul...

Page 771: ...elf Slide the unit inward until the unit is halfway in then move it inward with a quick push This movement easily overcomes the compression of the stabs as they engage the vertical bus Figure 127 NOTE The interlock is spring loaded and engages automatically when the control unit is inserted with a firm push to the operator handle Pressing the structure interlock release is not necessary 5 Retrieve...

Page 772: ...placed Damage caused by water or flood conditions requires special treatment Contact your Schneider Electric field sales representative NOTE Damaged arc rated MCCs must be inspected repaired and re qualified by Schneider Electric Services personnel to maintain the arc containment ratings DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH Apply appropriate personal protective equipment PPE and ...

Page 773: ...with an environmentally safe CFC free contact cleaner Reduce the entry of foreign matter into the enclosure 6 Short circuit or ground fault 6 Remove the fault ensure that the fuse and circuit breaker sizes are correct 7 Loose connection in the power circuit 7 Clear and tighten the connection 8 Sustained overload 8 Check for excessive motor load current or install a larger device Coils Open Circuit...

Page 774: ...d lead must be looped the same number of passes Overload relay trips while running normally 1 Load is too heavy for motor horsepower 1 Remove excessive motor load or resize motor 2 Incorrect overload FLA setting 2 Set FLA adjustment according to motor full load current 3 Use of electronic DC injection brake 3 Do not use electronic DC injection brakes with solid state overload relay 4 Incorrect ove...

Page 775: ...30 s 3 If the fault still persists replace the TeSys T Magnetic And Mechanical Parts Noisy Magnet 1 Broken shading coil 1 Replace the magnet and armature 2 Dirt or rust on magnet faces 2 Clean the magnet with a clean dry cloth 3 Low voltage 3 Check the coil terminal voltage and voltage dips during starting Failure To Pick Up and Seal 1 No control voltage 1 Check the control circuit wiring for a lo...

Page 776: ...lying this equipment before working on or inside equipment Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm power is off Replace all devices doors and covers before turning on power to this equipment Follow the instructions in Insulation Test on page 66 Failure to follow this instruction will result in death or serious injury NOTE Disconnect all solid state devices such as SPDs drives...

Page 777: ... 62 9 17 B 14 8 72 9 27 B 14 0 30 9 32 5 B 56 1 34 1 53 B 2 10 9 18 10 0 B 15 5 9 28 10 2 B 15 5 32 6 34 9 B 62 1 54 1 73 B 2 40 10 1 11 0 B 17 5 10 3 11 4 B 17 5 35 0 39 7 B 70 1 74 1 89 B 2 65 11 1 11 8 B 19 5 11 5 12 3 B 19 5 39 8 44 7 B 79 1 90 2 17 B 3 00 11 9 13 5 B 22 12 4 13 9 B 22 2 18 2 53 B 3 30 13 6 15 3 B 25 2 54 2 87 B 3 70 15 4 17 4 B 28 2 88 3 22 B 4 15 17 5 19 4 B 32 3 23 3 49 B 4...

Page 778: ...194 209 B 4 85 132 149 DD 160 238 243 DD 300 73 2 81 5 B 1 88 210 232 B 5 50 150 170 DD 185 244 266 DD 320 81 6 92 3 B 2 10 233 248 B 6 25 92 4 104 B 2 40 249 266 B 6 90 105 114 B 2 65 Size 5 with CT Type Overloads and Fusible Switch Disconnects Motor Full Load Current A Thermal Unit Number Max Fuse Rating A Motor Full Load Current A Thermal Unit Number Max Fuse Rating A 40 8 45 5 B 1 03 90 115 12...

Page 779: ...5 65 2 69 9 B 56 3 08 3 47 B 2 40 20 2 22 1 B 17 5 20 6 22 9 B 17 5 70 0 79 5 B 62 3 48 3 79 B 2 65 22 2 23 7 B 19 5 23 0 24 7 B 19 5 79 6 89 4 B 70 3 80 4 35 B 3 00 23 8 27 1 B 22 4 36 5 07 B 3 30 27 2 30 7 B 25 5 08 5 75 B 3 70 30 8 34 9 B 28 5 76 6 45 B 4 15 35 0 38 9 B 32 6 46 6 99 B 4 85 39 0 44 5 B 36 7 00 7 71 B 5 50 44 6 50 3 B 40 7 72 8 23 B 6 25 50 4 54 0 B 45 Size 3 Size 4 Motor Full Lo...

Page 780: ... 240 91 2 101 B 1 16 258 281 B 3 30 204 223 DD 128 396 409 DD 250 102 115 B 1 30 282 321 B 3 70 224 239 DD 140 410 427 DD 265 116 131 B 1 45 322 387 B 4 15 240 253 DD 150 428 475 DD 289 132 146 B 1 67 388 419 B 4 85 254 299 DD 160 476 487 DD 300 147 163 B 1 84 420 465 B 5 50 300 341 DD 185 488 532 DD 320 164 184 B 2 10 466 497 B 6 25 185 209 B 2 40 496 532 B 6 90 210 229 B 2 65 Size 5 with CT Type...

Page 781: ...4 AR 27 39 2 40 9 AR 86 1 59 1 74 AR 2 98 10 4 11 7 AR 17 6 14 5 16 4 AR 30 41 0 45 0 AR 94 1 75 1 94 AR 3 28 11 8 13 3 AR 20 5 1 95 2 20 AR 3 62 13 4 15 2 AR 23 2 21 2 47 AR 3 98 15 3 17 2 AR 27 2 48 2 76 AR 4 37 17 3 19 7 AR 30 2 77 3 07 AR 4 80 19 8 22 4 AR 35 3 08 3 45 AR 5 3 22 5 26 0 AR 40 Size 3 Size 4 Motor Full Load Current A Thermal Unit Number Motor Full Load Current A Thermal Unit Numb...

Page 782: ...AR 12 4 19 50 22 3 AR 20 5 67 2 73 8 AR 72 2 72 2 95 AR 2 46 15 80 17 91 AR 13 6 22 4 25 5 AR 23 74 0 78 3 AR 79 2 96 3 17 AR 2 71 17 92 20 7 AR 15 4 25 6 28 9 AR 27 78 4 81 9 AR 86 3 18 3 49 AR 2 98 20 8 23 5 AR 17 6 29 0 32 9 AR 30 82 0 90 0 AR 94 3 50 3 89 AR 3 28 23 6 26 7 AR 20 5 3 90 4 41 AR 3 62 26 8 30 5 AR 23 4 42 4 95 AR 3 98 30 6 34 5 AR 27 4 96 5 53 AR 4 37 34 6 39 5 AR 30 5 54 6 15 AR...

Page 783: ...r from the unit and then remove the phase insulators from the breaker see Figure 128 7 Unpack the new circuit breaker and reinstall the circuit breaker phase insulators in the slots provided on the circuit breaker 8 Place the circuit breaker in the mounting pan making sure that the line insulator is in position under the circuit breaker Secure the circuit breaker with the two mounting screws provi...

Page 784: ...trol Centers 80459 641 01E Section 14 Installation and Maintenance Log 10 2012 1999 2012 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 112 ENGLISH Section 14 Installation and Maintenance Log Date Job Description Name Initials ...

Page 785: ...from the right panel 3 Align the arrows on the left panel and top track as shown in Figure 129 Lift the panel out of the bottom track and remove the panel 4 Align the arrows on the right panel and top track as shown in Figure 129 Lift the panel out of the bottom track and remove the panel DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH Apply appropriate personal protective equipment PPE and...

Page 786: ...s off 2 Align the arrows on the right panel and top track as shown in Figure 131 3 Lift the panel up into the rear groove of the top track 4 Lower the panel into the rear groove of the bottom track 5 Slide the panel to the far right 6 Align the arrows on the left panel and top track 7 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 using the left panel and front groove 8 Slide the panel to the left until it locks snaps into...

Page 787: ...ket 4 Pull out on the bottom of the left side panel until the tab at the top of the panel is clear of the top track see Figure 133 on page 116 5 Remove the panel from the MCC 6 Repeat steps 3 5 for the right side panel DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH Apply appropriate personal protective equipment PPE and follow safe electrical work practices See NFPA 70E or CSA Z462 This eq...

Page 788: ...perly rated voltage sensing device to confirm the power is off 2 Insert the tab on the right side panel into the top track on the right side of the MCC and set it into place see Figure 132 on page 115 and Figure 133 3 Secure the right side panel by pushing the rivet firmly into the hole of the mounting bracket 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the left side panel Figure 133 Horizontal Bus Barrier Install...

Page 789: ...lectrical personnel Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside equipment Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm power is off After removing rivets and screws verify that the compartment is free of loose particles Replace all devices doors and covers before turning on power to this equipment Failure to follow this instruction will result in death ...

Page 790: ... either the Model 5 MCC Installation and Maintenance Manual 8998IM9101R5 92 or Removing the Control Unit on page 57 of this bulletin for unit removal instructions If necessary contact your local Schneider Electric field sales representative to obtain this bulletin Existing Brackets 15 in 381 mm Deep MCC Only If the MCC is 15 in 381 mm deep use a 1 8 in 3 mm drill bit to remove the rivets that hold...

Page 791: ...ivets in the retrofit kit to attach the retrofit brackets to the left and right side channels see Figure 137 20 in 508 mm deep MCC Use the screws provided in the retrofit kit to attach the retrofit brackets to the left and right side channels Align the holes in the bracket and side channel as shown in Figure 138 on page 120 NOTES Even if the holes are present for a direct mounting of the endcap to...

Page 792: ... the side channel either to the right or left side of the structure 2 Insert one end of the top track into the attached endcap 3 Place the other endcap on the opposite end of the top track and slide the top track into place 4 Rivet the second endcap to the retrofit bracket Figure 138 20 in 508 mm Deep MCC Retrofit Bracket Topshelf Top retrofit bracket Screw 1 4 x 20 x 1 2 in Side channel Figure 13...

Page 793: ...racket to the topshelf NOTE If the bus contains four laminations access the rivet holes from underneath the topshelf b Relay topshelf Align the two holes on the relay shelf with the bottom retrofit bracket holes see Figure 141 Mark the places where you will drill other holes to secure the bottom track to the shelf Drill the holes using a drill bit ranging from 0 136 in 0 147 in 3 mm 4 mm in diamet...

Page 794: ...nel up into the rear groove of the top track 3 Lower the panel into the rear groove of the bottom track 4 Slide the panel to the far right 5 Align the arrows on the left panel and top track 6 Repeat Steps 2 and 3 using the left panel and front groove 7 Slide the panel to the left until it locks snaps into place 8 Verify that the barrier is completely closed by making sure that the wiring compartme...

Page 795: ...Model 5 MCC Installation and Maintenance Manual 8998IM9101R5 92 or Removing the Control Unit on page 57 of this bulletin for instructions on installing units in an MCC 2 Replace the top horizontal wireway cover 3 Replace or close all other covers or doors before turning on the power to the MCC Figure 144 Aligning the Arrows on the Panels Align arrows Lift up on panel DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOC...

Page 796: ... and soft starter units 45 in or taller that shipped before July 2003 with a side panel opening as shown in Figure 145A require an auto shutter cover Square D Seneca part 80451 765 01 The auto shutter cover aligns with the back edge of the center most flat head screw as shown in Figure 145B There are four main components of the automatic vertical bus shutter see Figure 146 on page 125 1 Operator M...

Page 797: ...erly rated voltage sensing device to confirm the power is off 2 Position the midshelf Figure 148 Item A on 126 in the appropriate area of the structure 3 Place the mounting foot Item B of the shelf into the mounting pan slots Item C Secure the shelf on the left and right with flat head screws Detail A Item D 4 Install the hinge leaves Detail A Item E and the door Item F into the hinge slots Item G...

Page 798: ...the pocket of the midshelf above the unit 13 Insert the unit into the MCC Follow the procedures in Section 4 Installing the MCC 14 Replace all devices doors and covers before turning on the power to the equipment Figure 147 Shelf Installation Style 1 Table 18 Shelf Installation Kit Parts Style 1 Description Quantity Item Midshelf 1 A Flat head screws 2 D Unit door 1 F Hex head screws 4 H Quarter t...

Page 799: ...nner left edge of the midshelf 6 Slide the automatic shutter assembly downward clearing the midshelf 7 Rotate the assembly downward to clear the front corner channel of the structure 8 Remove the automatic shutter assembly 9 Replace all devices doors and covers before turning on the power to the equipment DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH Apply appropriate personal protective ...

Page 800: ...y by rotating the mechanism housing upward to clear the front corner channel of the structure 7 Slide the automatic shutter assembly upward so that it fits snugly to the left edge of the midshelf 8 Loosely insert a 10 32 x 3 8 in mounting screw through the inner left edge of the midshelf and into the square nuts in the housing DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH Apply appropriat...

Page 801: ...l bus assembly 11 Tighten the 10 32 x 3 8 in mounting screw inserted in step 8 12 Push the operator mechanism to the rear ensuring the shutter rotates upward into the pocket of the midshelf above the unit See Figure 148 13 Insert the unit into the MCC Follow the procedures in Section 4 Installing the MCC 14 Replace all devices doors and covers before turning on the power to the equipment Figure 15...

Page 802: ...emove the automatic shutter assembly 9 Replace all devices doors and covers before turning on the power to the equipment Operation Styles 1 and 2 Inserting a Unit When a unit is inserted into the Model 6 MCC structure the operator mechanism opens the automatic bus shutter allowing the unit stabs to connect with the vertical bus Removing a Unit The automatic shutter will close when a unit is remove...

Page 803: ...hnical Assistance Group is your first point of contact for any MCC questions Or contact your local distributor Schneider Electric field sales office Seneca SC MCC Technical Assistance Group TAG 800 634 2003 PowerLogic Equipment SMS 3000 Software La Vergne TN PowerLogic Technical Assistance 615 287 3400 Variable Frequency Drives Soft Starters Starters Contactors Overloads Raleigh NC Raleigh Help De...

Page 804: ...rload relay size 71 retrofit applications 70 torque values 71 troubleshooting 102 Motor Logic Plus 80 local programming 82 remote programming 83 motor protection relays 80 N NEMA Type 1 enclosures ground bus splicing 42 joining 20 power bus splicing 35 42 seismic tie down locations 25 NEMA Type 1 Gasketed enclosures joining 20 seismic tie down locations 25 splice gaskets 28 NEMA Type 12 enclosures...

Page 805: ...Notes ENGLISH ...

Page 806: ...Notes ENGLISH ...

Page 807: ...Notes ENGLISH ...

Page 808: ...or Logic Plus PowerLogic PowerPact Square D Schneider Electric and TeSys are trademarks or registered trademarks of Schneider Electric Other trademarks used herein are the property of their respective owners 80459 641 01E 10 2012 Replaces 80459 641 01D 09 2008 1999 2012 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider Electric USA Inc 1990 Sandifer Blvd Seneca SC 29678 USA 1 888 778 2733 www schne...

Page 809: ... ǁǁǁ ǁŝůĚƐƚŽŶĞ ĐŽŵ 2 0DLQ 6WUHHW 3K 3HQWLFWRQ D DQDGD 9 ...

Page 810: ......

Page 811: ......

Page 812: ......

Page 813: ...al work practices See NFPA 70E This equipment must be installed and serviced only by qualified electrical personnel Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside equipment Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm power is off Replace all devices doors and covers before turning on power to this equipment Failure to follow this instruction will result i...

Page 814: ...sing four 10 32 x 4 5 in screws A provided Torque screws to 36 lb in 4 N m Figure 2 Mount Circuit Breaker pu sh to tri p 06123086 A 6 For bus connected circuit breakers bolt bus to circuit breaker by inserting bolt A provided through holes in bus into circuit breaker nut plate B Secure bus with nut C provided Torque nuts to 250 in lb 28 N m Figure 3 Install Bus 06123093 B A C 0 75 in 19 mm max 1 P...

Page 815: ...o bus Figure 5 Start Racking Circuit Breaker onto Bus 4 Insert second screwdriver A into bottom slot Rack circuit breaker further onto bus using alternate screwdrivers until circuit breaker jaws completely engage bus bars and mounting screws align with teardrop opening in pan Figure 6 Rack Circuit Breaker Completely onto Bus 5 Tighten all mounting bracket screws A firmly without bending mounting b...

Page 816: ...l Cu 3 0 500 kcmil 95 240 mm2 3 1 0 in 25 mm 442 5 lb in 50 N m 9 12 lb in 1 1 3 N m CU800M23K Cu AL800P6K1 Al Cu 3 0 600 kcmil 95 300 mm2 2 1 2 in 30 mm 442 5 lb in 50 N m 9 12 lb in 1 1 3 N m AL1200P24K1 Al Cu 3 0 500 kcmil 95 240 mm2 4 1 2 in 30 mm 442 5 lb in 50 N m 9 12 lb in 1 1 3 N m CU1200P24K Cu 1 For version with tapped hole for control wire add a T before the K to the catalog number i e...

Page 817: ...inding screw 4 Install right top cable and torque wire binding screw For field installable lug kits see instruction bulletin shipped with kit 06123150 06123141 1 2 3 4 CAUTION HAZARD OF CONDUCTOR MOVEMENT UNDER SHORT CIRCUIT CONDITIONS Restrain circuit breaker conductors as required in Table 2 Failure to follow this instruction will result in equipment damage Table 2 Cable Restraint Recommendation...

Page 818: ...e four times around conductors 4 in 102 mm below where conductors exit enclosure A Pull rope B taut 5 Wrap rope C several times until space between first two sets of conductors is completely filled Bring rope D through right hand space Pull rope taut Figure 12 Wrap Conductors 6 Wrap rope A several times until space between second and third set of conductors is completely filled Weave final rope lo...

Page 819: ...F SHOCK EXPLOSION OR EQUIPMENT DAMAGE Wires A must be routed as shown Do not route wires below handle or around outside rim of circuit breaker Wires exiting from off end of circuit breaker must be routed beneath trip unit see label B Failure to follow this instruction can result in injury or equipment damage 1 Install field installable circuit breaker accessories as instructed in the instructions ...

Page 820: ...ews Do not use power equipment to torque screws Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage Replace accessory cover Replace all four accessory cover screws Hand tighten screws to 11 13 lb in 1 2 1 5 N m Do not exceed torque specification of screws Figure 15 Replace Accessory Cover 06123225 Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside equipment Remov...

Page 821: ...otective equipment PPE and follow safe electrical work practices See NFPA 70E This equipment must be installed and serviced only by qualified electrical personnel Troubleshooting may require energizing auxiliary devices with a test power supply Make sure that the power supply is off before connecting or disconnecting it to the auxiliary device Do not touch the terminals of the device during the te...

Page 822: ...l Rights Reserved 10 ENGLISH DIMENSIONS Enclosure Information Table 5 Enclosure Dimensions Circuit Breaker Enclosure Dimensions H x W x D in mm 51 9 x 20 25 x 7 75 1318 3 x 514 4 x 196 9 Figure 18 Enclosure Mounting Holes and Door Cutout Dimensions 48096 447 01 Dimensions in mm ...

Page 823: ...ircuit Breakers 02 2006 2003 2006 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11 ENGLISH Circuit Breaker Dimensions Figure 19 Individually mounted 800 A 3 pole Circuit Breaker with Lugs at Both Ends 48096 445 01 Dimensions in mm ...

Page 824: ...51 01 02 2006 2003 2006 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 12 ENGLISH Figure 20 Individually mounted 800 A 3 pole Circuit Breaker without Lugs 48096 446 01 Partial View B opposite side Partial View A opposite side Dimensions in mm ...

Page 825: ... el personal eléctrico especializado deberá instalar y prestar servicio de mantenimiento a este equipo Desenergice el equipo antes de realizar cualquier trabajo en él Siempre utilice un dispositivo detector de tensión nominal adecuado para confirmar la desenergización del equipo Vuelva a colocar todos los dispositivos las puertas y las cubiertas antes de volver a energizar el equipo El incumplimie...

Page 826: ...tilizando los cuatro tornillos de 10 32 x 4 5 A incluidos Apriete los tornillos a 4 N m 36 lbs pulg Figura 2 Montaje del interruptor automático pu sh to tri p 06123086 A 6 Para los interruptores automáticos conectados a la barra atornille la barra al interruptor insertando el tornillo A incluido pasando por los agujeros en la barra y en la placa para tuercas B del interruptor Sujete la barra con l...

Page 827: ... enganchen completamente en las barras Figura 5 Inserción del interruptor automático en la barra 4 Inserte el segundo desatornillador A en la ranura inferior Monte el interruptor automático sobre la barra utilizando los desatornilladores alternadamente hasta que las mordazas enganchen completamente en las barras y los tornillos de montaje estén alineados con los agujeros rasgados en la bandeja Fig...

Page 828: ...mm 1 pulg 50 N m 442 5 lbs pulg 1 a 1 3 N m 9 a 30 lbs pulg CU800M23K Cu AL800P6K1 Al Cu 3 0 600 kcmil 95 300 mm2 2 30 mm 1 2 pulg 50 N m 442 5 lbs pulg 1 a 1 3 N m 9 a 12 lbs pulg AL1200P24K1 Al Cu 3 0 500 kcmil 95 240 mm2 4 30 mm 1 2 pulg 50 N m 442 5 lbs pulg 1 a 1 3 N m 9 a 12 lbs pulg CU1200P24K Cu 1 En las versiones con agujero roscado para el cable de control agregue la letra T antes de la ...

Page 829: ...de cables 2 Instale el cable inferior derecho y apriete el tornillo de sujeción de cables 3 Instale el cable superior izquierdo y apriete el tornillo de sujeción de cables 4 Instale el cable superior derecho y apriete el tornillo de sujeción de cables Consulte el boletín de instrucciones incluido con los accesorios de zapatas para su instalación en campo Figura 9 Instalación de los cables en las z...

Page 830: ...l bucle final de la cuerda debajo del bucle anterior B Pase la cuerda C por el espacio del lado derecho Jale la cuerda hasta tensarla 3 Enrede la cuerda D varias veces hasta llenar completamente el espacio entre el segundo y tercer grupo de conductores Entrelace el bucle final de la cuerda E debajo del bucle anterior como se muestra Jale la cuerda hasta tensarla Figura 11 Entrelace de la cuerda 4 ...

Page 831: ...ático esté en posición de disparado o abierto 2 Afloje los cuatro tornillos A de la cubierta de accesorios y retírela B Figura 14 Desmontaje de la cubierta de accesorios 06123225 A B ADVERTENCIA PELIGRO DE DESCARGA ELÉCTRICA EXPLOSIÓN O DAÑO AL EQUIPO Los cables A deben dirigirse de la manera mostrada No dirija los cables por debajo de la palanca o alrededor del borde exterior del interruptor auto...

Page 832: ...osed 06123229 OF3 32 34 31 Open 12 14 OF1 11 92 94 91 SD Tripped Funcionamiento remoto Contactos de alarma D1 C1 D2 C2 MN MX OF1 OF2 OF3 SD 11 21 31 91 12 22 32 92 14 24 34 94 06123230 82 81 SDE 84 PRECAUCIÓN PELIGRO DE DAÑO AL EQUIPO Apriete los cuatro tornillos según el valor indicado para sujetar la cubierta de accesorios No apriete los tornillos en exceso No utilice herramientas eléctricas par...

Page 833: ...ión personal EPP apropiado y siga las prácticas de seguridad eléctrica establecidas por su Compañía consulte la norma NFPA 70E Solamente el personal eléctrico especializado deberá instalar y prestar servicio de mantenimiento a este equipo Desenergice el equipo antes de realizar cualquier trabajo en él Siempre utilice un dispositivo detector de tensión nominal adecuado para confirmar la desenergiza...

Page 834: ... instrucción podrá causar la muerte o lesiones serias Condición Causas posibles Solución El interruptor no permanece cerrado 1 El ajuste de disparo es muy bajo 2 El disparo por baja tensión no está energizado 3 Disparo en derivación energizado 4 Cortocircuito o sobrecarga en el sistema 1 Ajuste el disparo 2 Energice el disparo por baja tensión 3 Desenergice el disparo en derivación 4 Revise el sis...

Page 835: ... todos los 23 ESPAÑOL Figura 18 Dimensiones de los agujeros de montaje y de los recortes de la puerta del gabinete 48096 447 01 Dimensiones pulg mm Recorte para la cubierta de accesorios Recorte para la palanca Recorte para el escudo de la cubierta de accesorios Recorte para el escudo de la palanca ...

Page 836: ...02 2006 2003 2006 Schneider Electric Reservados todos los 24 ESPAÑOL Dimensiones del interruptor automático Figura 19 Interruptor automático de montaje individual de 3 polos 800 A con zapatas en ambos extremos 48096 445 01 Dimensiones pulg mm DISPARADO ...

Page 837: ...lectric Reservados todos los 25 ESPAÑOL Figura 20 Interruptor automático de montaje individual de 3 polos 800 A sin zapatas 48096 446 01 Partial View B opposite side Partial View A opposite side Dimensiones pulg mm DISPARADO Vista parcial A lado opuesto Vista parcial B lado opuesto ...

Page 838: ...Interruptores automáticos con marco M 48049 251 01 02 2006 2003 2006 Schneider Electric Reservados todos los 26 ESPAÑOL ...

Page 839: ...nel qualifié doit effectuer l installation et l entretien de cet appareil Coupez l alimentation de l appareil avant d y travailler Utilisez toujours un dispositif de détection de tension à valeur nominale appropriée pour s assurer que l alimentation est coupée Replacez tous les dispositifs les portes et les couvercles avant de mettre l appareil sous tension Si cette précaution n est pas respectée ...

Page 840: ... l aide des quatre vis de 10 32 x 4 5 po A fournies Serrer les vis au couple de 4 N m 36 lb po Figure 2 Montage du disjoncteur pu sh to tri p 06123086 A 6 Pour les disjoncteurs raccordés par barres bus boulonner la barre bus au disjoncteur en insérant le boulon A fourni par les trous de la barre bus dans la plaque écrou B Fixer la barre bus avec l écrou C fourni Serrer les écrous au couple de 28 N...

Page 841: ...rres bus Figure 5 Commencer à embrocher le disjoncteur sur les barres bus 4 Insérer un deuxième tournevis A dans une fente inférieure Embrocher le disjoncteur sur la barre bus en employant les tournevis alternativement jusqu à ce que les mâchoires du disjoncteur s engagent complètement sur les barres bus et les vis de montage s alignent avec la fente oblongue de la cuve Figure 6 Embrocher le disjo...

Page 842: ...240 mm2 3 25 mm 1 0 po 50 N m 442 5 lb po 1 à 1 3 N m 9 à 12 lb po CU800M23K Cu AL800P6K1 Al Cu 3 0 à 600 kcmil 95 à 300 mm2 2 30 mm 1 2 po 50 N m 442 5 lb po 1 à 1 3 N m 9 à 12 lb po AL1200P24K1 Al Cu 3 0 à 500 kcmil 95 à 240 mm2 4 30 mm 1 2 po 50 N m 442 5 lb po 1 à 1 3 N m 9 à 12 lb po CU1200P24K Cu 1 Pour le modèle avec le trou taraudé pour le fil de contrôle ajouter un T devant le K au numéro...

Page 843: ... la vis de fixation de fils 2 Installer le câble inférieur droit et serrer la vis de fixation de fils 3 Installer le câble supérieur gauche et serrer la vis de fixation de fils 4 Installer le câble supérieur droit et serrer la vis de fixation de fils Pour les kits de cosses à installer sur place consulter les directives d utilisation expédiées avec le kit Figure 9 Installation des câbles des cosse...

Page 844: ...ucle précédente B Engager la corde C dans l espace de droite Tirer sur la corde et bien la tendre 3 Faire plusieurs tours avec la corde D jusqu à ce qu elle remplisse complètement l espace entre le deuxième et le troisième jeu des conducteurs Faire passer la dernière boucle de la corde E sous la boucle précédente comme indiqué Tirer sur la corde et bien la tendre Figure 11 Entourer de corde 4 Fair...

Page 845: ...du couvercle des accessoires 1 S assurer que le disjoncteur est en position de déclenché ou d arrêt 2 Desserrer les quatre vis A du couvercle des accessoires et retirer le couvercle B Figure 14 Retrait du couvercle des accessoires 06123225 A B AVERTISSEMENT RISQUE D ÉLECTROCUTION D EXPLOSION OU DES DOMMAGES MATÉRIELS Les fils A doivent être acheminés comme indiqué N acheminez pas les fils en desso...

Page 846: ... 32 34 31 Open 12 14 OF1 11 92 94 91 SD Tripped Fonctionnement à distance Contacts d alarme D1 C1 D2 C2 MN MX OF1 OF2 OF3 SD 11 21 31 91 12 22 32 92 14 24 34 94 06123230 82 81 SDE 84 ATTENTION RISQUE DES DOMMAGES MATÉRIELS Le couvercle des accessoires doit être fixé avec les quatre vis serrées au couple précisé Ne serrez pas à un couple excessif N utilisez pas un outil électrique pour serrer les v...

Page 847: ...ectrique sécuritaire Voir NFPA 70E Seul un personnel qualifié doit effectuer l installation et l entretien de cet appareil Coupez l alimentation de l appareil avant d y travailler Utilisez toujours un dispositif de détection de tension à valeur nominale appropriée pour s assurer que l alimentation est coupée Replacez tous les dispositifs les portes et les couvercles avant de mettre l appareil sous...

Page 848: ...possibles Solution Le disjoncteur ne reste pas fermé 1 Réglage de déclenchement trop bas 2 Le déclencheur sur baisse de tension est hors tension 3 Le déclencheur shunt est sous tension 4 Un court circuit ou surcharge est présent dans le système 1 Ajuster le réglage de déclenchement 2 Mettre le déclencheur sur baisse de tension sous tension 3 Mettre le déclencheur shunt hors tension 4 Rechercher un...

Page 849: ...és 37 FRANÇAIS Figure 18 Dimensions des trous de montage et des découpages du couvercle du boîtier 48096 447 01 Dimensions po mm Découpage pour le couvercle des accessoires Découpage pour la manette Découpage pour le plastron du couvercle des accessoires Découpage pour le plastron de la manette ...

Page 850: ...51 01 02 2006 2003 2004 Schneider Electric Tous droits réservés 38 FRANÇAIS Dimensions du disjoncteur Figure 19 Disjoncteur monté individuellement à 3 pôles 800 A avec cosses aux deux extrémités 48096 445 01 DÉCLENCHÉ Dimensions po mm ...

Page 851: ...lectric Tous droits réservés 39 FRANÇAIS Figure 20 Disjoncteurs montés individuellement à 3 pôles 800 A sans cosses 48096 446 01 Partial View B opposite side Partial View A opposite side DÉCLENCHÉ Vue partielle A côté opposé Dimensions po mm Vue partielle B côté opposé ...

Page 852: ...sume aucune responsabilité des conséquences éventuelles découlant de l utilisation de cette documentation Schneider Electric 3700 Sixth St SW Cedar Rapids IA 52404 USA 1 888 SquareD 1 888 778 2733 www SquareD com Importado en México por Schneider Electric México S A de C V Calz J Rojo Gómez 1121 A Col Gpe del Moral 09300 México D F Tel 55 5804 5000 www schneider electric com mx Schneider Canada In...

Page 853: ...device to confirm power is off Replace all devices doors and covers before turning on power to this equipment PELIGRO DE DESCARGA ÉLÉCTRICA EXPLOSIÓN O DESTELLO POR ARQUEO Utilice equipo de protección personal EPP apropiado y siga las prácticas de seguridad eléctrica establecidas por su Compañía consulte la norma NFPA 70E Solamente el personal eléctrico especializado deberá instalar y prestar serv...

Page 854: ...ranuras de las barras del tablero C 4 Aligner les languettes de partie arrière de boîtier du disjoncteur B avec les fentes de la pile de bus du panneau de distribution C 5 Place circuit breaker on I Line pan with jaws pushed against bus 5 Coloque el interruptor automático en la bandeja I Line con las mordazas contra la barra 5 Placer le disjoncteur sur la cuve I Line avec les mâchoires contre le b...

Page 855: ...AUTOMÁTICO INSTALLATION DU DISJONCTEUR MONTÉ INDIVIDUELLEMENT OU DE L INTERRUPTEUR AUTOMATIQUE 1 Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside equipment 1 Desenergice el equipo antes de realizar cualquier trabajo en él 1 Couper l alimentation de l appareil avant d y travailler 2 Turn off circuit breaker 2 Desconecte el interruptor automático 2 Mettre le disjoncteur hors t...

Page 856: ...nnection Lugs Applied to OFF O End I Line estándar Zapatas para el extremo abierto O I Line standard Cosses apliquées à l extrémité arrêt O ON I end Extremo cerrado I Extrémité marche I 1 Q_Annnnn Bolt on I Line Connection I Line atornillada I Line boulonnée ON I end only Extremo cerrado I solamente Extrémité marche I uniquement 1 2 Q_Ennn Lug Connection Zapata Cosse ON I and or OFF O end Extremo ...

Page 857: ...r de dénudage Line End Extremo de línea Extrémité de ligne Load End Extremo de carga Extrémité de charge 250 lb in lbs pulg lb po 28 N m Wire Size Calibre de cable Calibre du fil 4 AWG 300 kcmil 25 150 mm 07343053 Line End Extremo de línea Extrémité de ligne Load End Extremo de carga Extrémité de charge NOTE Requires 1 4 20 UNC 2B nut and conical spring washer provided NOTA Requiere una tuerca de ...

Page 858: ...a prise de côntrole 07343021 07343022 NOTE I Line circuit breaker is shown NOTA Se muestra un interruptor automático I Line REMARQUE Disjoncteur I Line représenté Push to trip Button Botón de disparo Bouton pousser pour déclencher Push to trip Button Botón de disparo Bouton pousser pour déclencher On Cerrado Marche Tripped Disparado Déclenché Off Abierto Arrêt Reset Restablecimiento Réarmement 073...

Page 859: ...eléctricos deberá cumplir con los requisitos de la norma 70 E de NFPA Seguridad eléctrica para los trabajadores en el sitio de trabajo y la norma 29 CFR Parte 1910 Subparte S de OSHA relacionada con las instalaciones eléctricas RISQUE D ÉLECTROCUTION D EXPLOSION OU D ECLAIR D ARC Portez un équipement de protection personnel ÉPP approprié et observez les méthodes de travail électrique sécuritaire V...

Page 860: ...tation Schneider Electric USA 3700 Sixth St SW Cedar Rapids IA 52404 USA 1 888 SquareD 1 888 778 2733 www SquareD com Importado en México por Schneider Electric México S A de C V Calz J Rojo Gómez 1121 A Col Gpe del Moral 09300 México D F Tel 55 5804 5000 www schneider electric com mx Schneider Canada Inc 19 Waterman Avenue M4B 1 Y2 Toronto Ontario 1 800 565 6699 www schneider electric ca 2002 200...

Page 861: ... ǁǁǁ ǁŝůĚƐƚŽŶĞ ĐŽŵ 2 0DLQ 6WUHHW 3K 3HQWLFWRQ D DQDGD 9 ...

Page 862: ......

Page 863: ......

Page 864: ......

Page 865: ......

Page 866: ......

Page 867: ......

Page 868: ......

Page 869: ......

Page 870: ......

Page 871: ......

Page 872: ......

Page 873: ......

Page 874: ......

Page 875: ......

Search results

Summary of Contents for sc200

Reviews:

Brands by name

Popular brands

Hach sc200, User Manual

Search results

Summary of Contents for sc200

Reviews:

Brands by name

Popular brands